First attempt at doc for general uses of quotes around symbols.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gdb / doc / gdb.texinfo
1 _dnl__ -*-Texinfo-*-
2 _dnl__ Copyright (c) 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 _dnl__ $Id$
4 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*-
5 @c Copyright (c) 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6 @c %**start of header
7 @setfilename _GDBP__.info
8 _if__(_GENERIC__)
9 @settitle Debugging with _GDBN__
10 _fi__(_GENERIC__)
11 _if__(!_GENERIC__)
12 @settitle Debugging with _GDBN__ (_HOST__)
13 _fi__(!_GENERIC__)
14 @setchapternewpage odd
15 @c @smallbook
16 @c @cropmarks
17 @c %**end of header
18
19 @finalout
20 @syncodeindex ky cp
21
22 _0__@c ===> NOTE! <==_1__
23 @c Determine the edition number in *three* places by hand:
24 @c 1. First ifinfo section 2. title page 3. top node
25 @c To find the locations, search for !!set
26
27 @c The following is for Pesch for his RCS system.
28 @c This revision number *not* the same as the Edition number.
29 @tex
30 \def\$#1${{#1}} % Kluge: collect RCS revision info without $...$
31 \xdef\manvers{\$Revision$} % For use in headers, footers too
32 @end tex
33
34 @c GDB CHANGELOG CONSULTED BETWEEN:
35 @c Fri Oct 11 23:27:06 1991 John Gilmore (gnu at cygnus.com)
36 @c Sat Dec 22 02:51:40 1990 John Gilmore (gnu at cygint)
37
38 @c THIS MANUAL REQUIRES TEXINFO-2 macros and info-makers to format properly.
39
40 @ifinfo
41 @format
42 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
43 * Gdb: (gdb). The GNU debugger.
44 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
45 @end format
46 @end ifinfo
47 _if__(0)
48
49 NOTE: this manual is marked up for preprocessing with a collection
50 of m4 macros called "pretex.m4".
51
52 THIS IS THE SOURCE PRIOR TO PREPROCESSING. The full source needs to
53 be run through m4 before either tex- or info- formatting: for example,
54 _0__
55 m4 pretex.m4 none.m4 all.m4 gdb.texinfo >gdb-all.texinfo
56 will produce (assuming your path finds either GNU m4 >= 0.84, or SysV
57 m4; Berkeley will not do) a file suitable for formatting. See the text in
58 "pretex.m4" for a fuller explanation (and the macro definitions).
59 _1__
60
61 _fi__(0)
62 @c
63 @ifinfo
64 This file documents the GNU debugger _GDBN__.
65
66 @c !!set edition, date, version
67 This is Edition 4.06, July 1992,
68 of @cite{Debugging with _GDBN__: the GNU Source-Level Debugger}
69 for GDB Version _GDB_VN__.
70
71 Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
72
73 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
74 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
75 are preserved on all copies.
76
77 @ignore
78 Permission is granted to process this file through TeX and print the
79 results, provided the printed document carries copying permission
80 notice identical to this one except for the removal of this paragraph
81 (this paragraph not being relevant to the printed manual).
82
83 @end ignore
84 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
85 manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
86 section entitled ``GNU General Public License'' is included exactly as
87 in the original, and provided that the entire resulting derived work is
88 distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this
89 one.
90
91 Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
92 into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
93 except that the section entitled ``GNU General Public License'' may be
94 included in a translation approved by the Free Software Foundation
95 instead of in the original English.
96 @end ifinfo
97
98 @titlepage
99 @title Debugging with _GDBN__
100 @subtitle The GNU Source-Level Debugger
101 _if__(!_GENERIC__)
102 @subtitle on _HOST__ Systems
103 _fi__(!_GENERIC__)
104 @sp 1
105 @c !!set edition, date, version
106 @subtitle Edition 4.06, for _GDBN__ version _GDB_VN__
107 @subtitle July 1992
108 @author by Richard M. Stallman and Roland H. Pesch
109 @page
110 @tex
111 {\parskip=0pt
112 \hfill pesch\@cygnus.com\par
113 \hfill {\it Debugging with _GDBN__}, \manvers\par
114 \hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
115 }
116 @end tex
117
118 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
119 Copyright @copyright{} 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
120
121 Permission is granted to make and distribute verbatim copies of
122 this manual provided the copyright notice and this permission notice
123 are preserved on all copies.
124
125 Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this
126 manual under the conditions for verbatim copying, provided also that the
127 section entitled ``GNU General Public License'' is included exactly as
128 in the original, and provided that the entire resulting derived work is
129 distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this
130 one.
131
132 Permission is granted to copy and distribute translations of this manual
133 into another language, under the above conditions for modified versions,
134 except that the section entitled ``GNU General Public License'' may be
135 included in a translation approved by the Free Software Foundation
136 instead of in the original English.
137 @end titlepage
138 @page
139
140 @ifinfo
141 @node Top, Summary, (dir), (dir)
142 @top Debugging with _GDBN__
143
144 This file describes _GDBN__, the GNU symbolic debugger.
145
146 @c !!set edition, date, version
147 This is Edition 4.06, July 1992, for GDB Version _GDB_VN__.
148 @end ifinfo
149
150 @menu
151 * Summary:: Summary of _GDBN__
152 * New Features:: New features since GDB version 3.5
153 * Sample Session:: A sample _GDBN__ session
154 * Invocation:: Getting in and out of _GDBN__
155 * Commands:: _GDBN__ commands
156 * Running:: Running programs under _GDBN__
157 * Stopping:: Stopping and continuing
158 * Stack:: Examining the stack
159 * Source:: Examining source files
160 * Data:: Examining data
161 * Languages:: Using _GDBN__ with different languages
162 * Symbols:: Examining the symbol table
163 * Altering:: Altering execution
164 * _GDBN__ Files:: _GDBN__'s files
165 * Targets:: Specifying a debugging target
166 * Controlling _GDBN__:: Controlling _GDBN__
167 * Sequences:: Canned sequences of commands
168 * Emacs:: Using _GDBN__ under GNU Emacs
169 * _GDBN__ Bugs:: Reporting bugs in _GDBN__
170 * Renamed Commands::
171 * Formatting Documentation:: How to format and print GDB documentation
172 * Installing GDB:: Installing GDB
173 * Copying:: GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
174 * Index:: Index
175
176 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
177
178 Summary of _GDBN__
179
180 * Free Software:: Freely redistributable software
181 * Contributors:: Contributors to _GDBN__
182
183 Getting In and Out of _GDBN__
184
185 * Invoking _GDBN__:: How to start _GDBN__
186 * Leaving _GDBN__:: How to quit _GDBN__
187 * Shell Commands:: How to use shell commands inside _GDBN__
188
189 Starting _GDBN__
190
191 * File Options:: Choosing Files
192 * Mode Options:: Choosing Modes
193
194 _GDBN__ Commands
195
196 * Command Syntax:: Command Syntax
197 * Completion:: Command Completion
198 * Help:: Getting Help
199
200 Running Programs Under _GDBN__
201
202 * Compilation:: Compiling for Debugging
203 * Starting:: Starting your Program
204 * Arguments:: Your Program's Arguments
205 * Environment:: Your Program's Environment
206 * Working Directory:: Your Program's Working Directory
207 * Input/Output:: Your Program's Input and Output
208 * Attach:: Debugging an Already-Running Process
209 * Kill Process:: Killing the Child Process
210 * Process Information:: Additional Process Information
211
212 Stopping and Continuing
213
214 * Breakpoints:: Breakpoints, Watchpoints, and Exceptions
215 * Continuing and Stepping:: Resuming Execution
216 * Signals:: Signals
217
218 Breakpoints, Watchpoints, and Exceptions
219
220 * Set Breaks:: Setting Breakpoints
221 * Set Watchpoints:: Setting Watchpoints
222 * Exception Handling:: Breakpoints and Exceptions
223 * Delete Breaks:: Deleting Breakpoints
224 * Disabling:: Disabling Breakpoints
225 * Conditions:: Break Conditions
226 * Break Commands:: Breakpoint Command Lists
227 * Breakpoint Menus:: Breakpoint Menus
228 * Error in Breakpoints:: ``Cannot insert breakpoints''
229
230 Examining the Stack
231
232 * Frames:: Stack Frames
233 * Backtrace:: Backtraces
234 * Selection:: Selecting a Frame
235 * Frame Info:: Information on a Frame
236
237 Examining Source Files
238
239 * List:: Printing Source Lines
240 * Search:: Searching Source Files
241 * Source Path:: Specifying Source Directories
242 * Machine Code:: Source and Machine Code
243
244 Examining Data
245
246 * Expressions:: Expressions
247 * Variables:: Program Variables
248 * Arrays:: Artificial Arrays
249 * Output formats:: Output formats
250 * Memory:: Examining Memory
251 * Auto Display:: Automatic Display
252 * Print Settings:: Print Settings
253 * Value History:: Value History
254 * Convenience Vars:: Convenience Variables
255 * Registers:: Registers
256 * Floating Point Hardware:: Floating Point Hardware
257
258 Using GDB with Different Languages
259
260 * Setting:: Switching between source languages
261 * Show:: Displaying the language
262 * Checks:: Type and Range checks
263 * Support:: Supported languages
264
265 Switching between source languages
266
267 * Manually:: Setting the working language manually
268 * Automatically:: Having GDB infer the source language
269
270 Type and range Checking
271
272 * Type Checking:: An overview of type checking
273 * Range Checking:: An overview of range checking
274
275 Supported Languages
276
277 * C:: C and C++
278 * Modula-2:: Modula-2
279
280 C and C++
281
282 * C Operators:: C and C++ Operators
283 * C Constants:: C and C++ Constants
284 * Cplusplus expressions:: C++ Expressions
285 * C Defaults:: Default settings for C and C++
286 * C Checks:: C and C++ Type and Range Checks
287 * Debugging C:: _GDBN__ and C
288 * Debugging C plus plus:: Special features for C++
289
290 Modula-2
291
292 * M2 Operators:: Built-in operators
293 * Built-In Func/Proc:: Built-in Functions and Procedures
294 * M2 Constants:: Modula-2 Constants
295 * M2 Defaults:: Default settings for Modula-2
296 * Deviations:: Deviations from standard Modula-2
297 * M2 Checks:: Modula-2 Type and Range Checks
298 * M2 Scope:: The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
299 * GDB/M2:: GDB and Modula-2
300
301 Altering Execution
302
303 * Assignment:: Assignment to Variables
304 * Jumping:: Continuing at a Different Address
305 * Signaling:: Giving your program a Signal
306 * Returning:: Returning from a Function
307 * Calling:: Calling your Program's Functions
308 * Patching:: Patching your Program
309
310 _GDBN__'s Files
311
312 * Files:: Commands to Specify Files
313 * Symbol Errors:: Errors Reading Symbol Files
314
315 Specifying a Debugging Target
316
317 * Active Targets:: Active Targets
318 * Target Commands:: Commands for Managing Targets
319 * Remote:: Remote Debugging
320
321 Remote Debugging
322
323 * i960-Nindy Remote:: _GDBN__ with a Remote i960 (Nindy)
324 * EB29K Remote:: _GDBN__ with a Remote EB29K
325 * VxWorks Remote:: _GDBN__ and VxWorks
326
327 _GDBN__ with a Remote i960 (Nindy)
328
329 * Nindy Startup:: Startup with Nindy
330 * Nindy Options:: Options for Nindy
331 * Nindy reset:: Nindy Reset Command
332
333 _GDBN__ with a Remote EB29K
334
335 * Comms (EB29K):: Communications Setup
336 * gdb-EB29K:: EB29K cross-debugging
337 * Remote Log:: Remote Log
338
339 _GDBN__ and VxWorks
340
341 * VxWorks connection:: Connecting to VxWorks
342 * VxWorks download:: VxWorks Download
343 * VxWorks attach:: Running Tasks
344
345 Controlling _GDBN__
346
347 * Prompt:: Prompt
348 * Editing:: Command Editing
349 * History:: Command History
350 * Screen Size:: Screen Size
351 * Numbers:: Numbers
352 * Messages/Warnings:: Optional Warnings and Messages
353
354 Canned Sequences of Commands
355
356 * Define:: User-Defined Commands
357 * Command Files:: Command Files
358 * Output:: Commands for Controlled Output
359
360 Reporting Bugs in _GDBN__
361
362 * Bug Criteria:: Have You Found a Bug?
363 * Bug Reporting:: How to Report Bugs
364
365 Installing GDB
366
367 * Separate Objdir:: Compiling _GDBN__ in another directory
368 * Config Names:: Specifying names for hosts and targets
369 * configure Options:: Summary of options for configure
370 @end menu
371
372 @node Summary, New Features, Top, Top
373 @unnumbered Summary of _GDBN__
374
375 The purpose of a debugger such as _GDBN__ is to allow you to see what is
376 going on ``inside'' another program while it executes---or what another
377 program was doing at the moment it crashed.
378
379 _GDBN__ can do four main kinds of things (plus other things in support of
380 these) to help you catch bugs in the act:
381
382 @itemize @bullet
383 @item
384 Start your program, specifying anything that might affect its behavior.
385
386 @item
387 Make your program stop on specified conditions.
388
389 @item
390 Examine what has happened, when your program has stopped.
391
392 @item
393 Change things in your program, so you can experiment with correcting the
394 effects of one bug and go on to learn about another.
395 @end itemize
396
397 You can use _GDBN__ to debug programs written in C, C++, and Modula-2.
398 Fortran support will be added when a GNU Fortran compiler is ready.
399
400 @menu
401 * Free Software:: Free Software
402 * Contributors:: Contributors to GDB
403 @end menu
404
405 @node Free Software, Contributors, Summary, Summary
406 @unnumberedsec Free Software
407
408 _GDBN__ is @dfn{free software}, protected by the GNU General Public License
409 (GPL). The GPL gives you the freedom to copy or adapt a licensed
410 program---but every person getting a copy also gets with it the
411 freedom to modify that copy (which means that they must get access to
412 the source code), and the freedom to distribute further copies.
413 Typical software companies use copyrights to limit your freedoms; the
414 Free Software Foundation uses the GPL to preserve these freedoms.
415
416 Fundamentally, the General Public License is a license which says that
417 you have these freedoms and that you cannot take these freedoms away
418 from anyone else.
419
420 For full details, @pxref{Copying, ,GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE}.
421
422 @node Contributors, , Free Software, Summary
423 @unnumberedsec Contributors to GDB
424
425 Richard Stallman was the original author of GDB, and of many other GNU
426 programs. Many others have contributed to its development. This
427 section attempts to credit major contributors. One of the virtues of
428 free software is that everyone is free to contribute to it; with
429 regret, we cannot actually acknowledge everyone here. The file
430 @file{ChangeLog} in the GDB distribution approximates a blow-by-blow
431 account.
432
433 Changes much prior to version 2.0 are lost in the mists of time.
434
435 @quotation
436 @emph{Plea:} Additions to this section are particularly welcome. If you
437 or your friends (or enemies; let's be evenhanded) have been unfairly
438 omitted from this list, we would like to add your names!
439 @end quotation
440
441 So that they may not regard their long labor as thankless, we
442 particularly thank those who shepherded GDB through major releases: Stu
443 Grossman and John Gilmore (releases 4.6, 4.5, 4.4), John Gilmore
444 (releases 4.3, 4.2, 4.1, 4.0, and 3.9); Jim Kingdon (releases 3.5, 3.4,
445 3.3); and Randy Smith (releases 3.2, 3.1, 3.0). As major maintainer of
446 GDB for some period, each contributed significantly to the structure,
447 stability, and capabilities of the entire debugger.
448
449 Richard Stallman, assisted at various times by Pete TerMaat, Chris
450 Hanson, and Richard Mlynarik, handled releases through 2.8.
451
452 Michael Tiemann is the author of most of the GNU C++ support in GDB,
453 with significant additional contributions from Per Bothner. James
454 Clark wrote the GNU C++ demangler. Early work on C++ was by Peter
455 TerMaat (who also did much general update work leading to release 3.0).
456
457 GDB 4 uses the BFD subroutine library to examine multiple
458 object-file formats; BFD was a joint project of David V.
459 Henkel-Wallace, Rich Pixley, Steve Chamberlain, and John Gilmore.
460
461 David Johnson wrote the original COFF support; Pace Willison did
462 the original support for encapsulated COFF.
463
464 Adam de Boor and Bradley Davis contributed the ISI Optimum V support.
465 Per Bothner, Noboyuki Hikichi, and Alessandro Forin contributed MIPS
466 support. Jean-Daniel Fekete contributed Sun 386i support. Chris
467 Hanson improved the HP9000 support. Noboyuki Hikichi and Tomoyuki
468 Hasei contributed Sony/News OS 3 support. David Johnson contributed
469 Encore Umax support. Jyrki Kuoppala contributed Altos 3068 support.
470 Keith Packard contributed NS32K support. Doug Rabson contributed
471 Acorn Risc Machine support. Chris Smith contributed Convex support
472 (and Fortran debugging). Jonathan Stone contributed Pyramid support.
473 Michael Tiemann contributed SPARC support. Tim Tucker contributed
474 support for the Gould NP1 and Gould Powernode. Pace Willison
475 contributed Intel 386 support. Jay Vosburgh contributed Symmetry
476 support.
477
478 Rich Schaefer and Peter Schauer helped with support of SunOS shared
479 libraries.
480
481 Jay Fenlason and Roland McGrath ensured that GDB and GAS agree about
482 several machine instruction sets.
483
484 Patrick Duval, Ted Goldstein, Vikram Koka and Glenn Engel helped
485 develop remote debugging. Intel Corporation and Wind River Systems
486 contributed remote debugging modules for their products.
487
488 Brian Fox is the author of the readline libraries providing
489 command-line editing and command history.
490
491 Andrew Beers of SUNY Buffalo wrote the language-switching code and
492 the Modula-2 support, and contributed the Languages chapter of this
493 manual.
494
495 Fred Fish wrote most of the support for Unix System Vr4, and enhanced
496 the command-completion support to cover C++ overloaded symbols.
497
498 @node New Features, Sample Session, Summary, Top
499 @unnumbered New Features since GDB version 3.5
500
501 @table @emph
502 @item Targets
503 Using the new command @code{target}, you can select at runtime whether
504 you are debugging local files, local processes, standalone systems over
505 a serial port, realtime systems over a TCP/IP connection, etc. The
506 command @code{load} can download programs into a remote system. Serial
507 stubs are available for Motorola 680x0 and Intel 80386 remote systems;
508 GDB also supports debugging realtime processes running under
509 VxWorks, using SunRPC Remote Procedure Calls over TCP/IP to talk to a
510 debugger stub on the target system. Internally, GDB now uses a
511 function vector to mediate access to different targets; if you need to
512 add your own support for a remote protocol, this makes it much easier.
513
514 @item Watchpoints
515 GDB now sports watchpoints as well as breakpoints. You can use a
516 watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an expression
517 changes, without having to predict a particular place in your program
518 where this may happen.
519
520 @item Wide Output
521 Commands that issue wide output now insert newlines at places designed
522 to make the output more readable.
523
524 @item Object Code Formats
525 GDB uses a new library called the Binary File Descriptor (BFD)
526 Library to permit it to switch dynamically, without reconfiguration or
527 recompilation, between different object-file formats. Formats currently
528 supported are COFF, a.out, and the Intel 960 b.out; files may be read as
529 .o's, archive libraries, or core dumps. BFD is available as a
530 subroutine library so that other programs may take advantage of it, and
531 the other GNU binary utilities are being converted to use it.
532
533 @item Configuration and Ports
534 Compile-time configuration (to select a particular architecture and
535 operating system) is much easier. The script @code{configure} now
536 allows you to configure GDB as either a native debugger or a
537 cross-debugger. @xref{Installing GDB}, for details on how to
538 configure.
539
540 @item Interaction
541 The user interface to GDB's control variables has been simplified
542 and consolidated in two commands, @code{set} and @code{show}. Output
543 lines are now broken at readable places, rather than overflowing onto
544 the next line. You can suppress output of machine-level addresses,
545 displaying only source language information.
546
547 @item C++
548 GDB now supports C++ multiple inheritance (if used with a GCC
549 version 2 compiler), and also has limited support for C++ exception
550 handling, with the commands @code{catch} and @code{info catch}: GDB
551 can break when an exception is raised, before the stack is peeled back
552 to the exception handler's context.
553
554 @item Modula-2
555 GDB now has preliminary support for the GNU Modula-2 compiler,
556 currently under development at the State University of New York at
557 Buffalo. Coordinated development of both GDB and the GNU Modula-2
558 compiler will continue into 1992. Other Modula-2 compilers are
559 currently not supported, and attempting to debug programs compiled with
560 them will likely result in an error as the symbol table of the
561 executable is read in.
562
563 @item Command Rationalization
564 Many GDB commands have been renamed to make them easier to remember
565 and use. In particular, the subcommands of @code{info} and
566 @code{show}/@code{set} are grouped to make the former refer to the state
567 of your program, and the latter refer to the state of GDB itself.
568 @xref{Renamed Commands}, for details on what commands were renamed.
569
570 @item Shared Libraries
571 GDB 4 can debug programs and core files that use SunOS, SVR4, or IBM RS/6000
572 shared libraries.
573
574 @item Reference Card
575 GDB 4 has a reference card. @xref{Formatting Documentation,,Formatting
576 the Documentation}, for instructions to print it.
577
578 @item Work in Progress
579 Kernel debugging for BSD and Mach systems; Tahoe and HPPA architecture
580 support.
581 @end table
582
583 @node Sample Session, Invocation, New Features, Top
584 @chapter A Sample _GDBN__ Session
585
586 You can use this manual at your leisure to read all about _GDBN__.
587 However, a handful of commands are enough to get started using the
588 debugger. This chapter illustrates these commands.
589
590 @iftex
591 In this sample session, we emphasize user input like this: @b{input},
592 to make it easier to pick out from the surrounding output.
593 @end iftex
594
595 @c FIXME: this example may not be appropriate for some configs, where
596 @c FIXME...primary interest is in remote use.
597 _0__
598 One of the preliminary versions of GNU @code{m4} (a generic macro
599 processor) exhibits the following bug: sometimes, when we change its
600 quote strings from the default, the commands used to capture one macro's
601 definition in another stop working. In the following short @code{m4}
602 session, we define a macro @code{foo} which expands to @code{0000}; we
603 then use the @code{m4} built-in @code{defn} to define @code{bar} as the
604 same thing. However, when we change the open quote string to
605 @code{<QUOTE>} and the close quote string to @code{<UNQUOTE>}, the same
606 procedure fails to define a new synonym @code{baz}:
607
608 @smallexample
609 $ @b{cd gnu/m4}
610 $ @b{./m4}
611 @b{define(foo,0000)}
612
613 @b{foo}
614 0000
615 @b{define(bar,defn(`foo'))}
616
617 @b{bar}
618 0000
619 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
620
621 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
622 @b{baz}
623 @b{C-d}
624 m4: End of input: 0: fatal error: EOF in string
625 @end smallexample
626
627 @noindent
628 Let's use _GDBN__ to try to see what's going on.
629
630 @smallexample
631 $ @b{_GDBP__ m4}
632 @c FIXME: this falsifies the exact text played out, to permit smallbook
633 @c FIXME... format to come out better.
634 GDB is free software and you are welcome to distribute copies
635 of it under certain conditions; type "show copying" to see
636 the conditions.
637 There is absolutely no warranty for GDB; type "show warranty"
638 for details.
639 GDB _GDB_VN__, Copyright 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc...
640 (_GDBP__)
641 @end smallexample
642
643 @noindent
644 _GDBN__ reads only enough symbol data to know where to find the rest when
645 needed; as a result, the first prompt comes up very quickly. We now
646 tell _GDBN__ to use a narrower display width than usual, so that examples
647 will fit in this manual.
648
649 @smallexample
650 (_GDBP__) @b{set width 70}
651 @end smallexample
652
653 @noindent
654 Let's see how the @code{m4} built-in @code{changequote} works.
655 Having looked at the source, we know the relevant subroutine is
656 @code{m4_changequote}, so we set a breakpoint there with _GDBN__'s
657 @code{break} command.
658
659 @smallexample
660 (_GDBP__) @b{break m4_changequote}
661 Breakpoint 1 at 0x62f4: file builtin.c, line 879.
662 @end smallexample
663
664 @noindent
665 Using the @code{run} command, we start @code{m4} running under _GDBN__
666 control; as long as control does not reach the @code{m4_changequote}
667 subroutine, the program runs as usual:
668
669 @smallexample
670 (_GDBP__) @b{run}
671 Starting program: /work/Editorial/gdb/gnu/m4/m4
672 @b{define(foo,0000)}
673
674 @b{foo}
675 0000
676 @end smallexample
677
678 @noindent
679 To trigger the breakpoint, we call @code{changequote}. _GDBN__
680 suspends execution of @code{m4}, displaying information about the
681 context where it stops.
682
683 @smallexample
684 @b{changequote(<QUOTE>,<UNQUOTE>)}
685
686 Breakpoint 1, m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
687 at builtin.c:879
688 879 if (bad_argc(TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[0]),argc,1,3))
689 @end smallexample
690
691 @noindent
692 Now we use the command @code{n} (@code{next}) to advance execution to
693 the next line of the current function.
694
695 @smallexample
696 (_GDBP__) @b{n}
697 882 set_quotes((argc >= 2) ? TOKEN_DATA_TEXT(argv[1])\
698 : nil,
699 @end smallexample
700
701 @noindent
702 @code{set_quotes} looks like a promising subroutine. We can go into it
703 by using the command @code{s} (@code{step}) instead of @code{next}.
704 @code{step} goes to the next line to be executed in @emph{any}
705 subroutine, so it steps into @code{set_quotes}.
706
707 @smallexample
708 (_GDBP__) @b{s}
709 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
710 at input.c:530
711 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
712 @end smallexample
713
714 @noindent
715 The display that shows the subroutine where @code{m4} is now
716 suspended (and its arguments) is called a stack frame display. It
717 shows a summary of the stack. We can use the @code{backtrace}
718 command (which can also be spelled @code{bt}), to see where we are
719 in the stack as a whole: the @code{backtrace} command displays a
720 stack frame for each active subroutine.
721
722 @smallexample
723 (_GDBP__) @b{bt}
724 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<QUOTE>", rq=0x34c88 "<UNQUOTE>")
725 at input.c:530
726 #1 0x6344 in m4_changequote (argc=3, argv=0x33c70)
727 at builtin.c:882
728 #2 0x8174 in expand_macro (sym=0x33320) at macro.c:242
729 #3 0x7a88 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=209696, td=0xf7fffa30)
730 at macro.c:71
731 #4 0x79dc in expand_input () at macro.c:40
732 #5 0x2930 in main (argc=0, argv=0xf7fffb20) at m4.c:195
733 @end smallexample
734
735 @noindent
736 Let's step through a few more lines to see what happens. The first two
737 times, we can use @samp{s}; the next two times we use @code{n} to avoid
738 falling into the @code{xstrdup} subroutine.
739
740 @smallexample
741 (_GDBP__) @b{s}
742 0x3b5c 532 if (rquote != def_rquote)
743 (_GDBP__) @b{s}
744 0x3b80 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? \
745 def_lquote : xstrdup(lq);
746 (_GDBP__) @b{n}
747 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
748 : xstrdup(rq);
749 (_GDBP__) @b{n}
750 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
751 @end smallexample
752
753 @noindent
754 The last line displayed looks a little odd; let's examine the variables
755 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} to see if they are in fact the new left
756 and right quotes we specified. We can use the command @code{p}
757 (@code{print}) to see their values.
758
759 @smallexample
760 (_GDBP__) @b{p lquote}
761 $1 = 0x35d40 "<QUOTE>"
762 (_GDBP__) @b{p rquote}
763 $2 = 0x35d50 "<UNQUOTE>"
764 @end smallexample
765
766 @noindent
767 @code{lquote} and @code{rquote} are indeed the new left and right quotes.
768 Let's look at some context; we can display ten lines of source
769 surrounding the current line, with the @code{l} (@code{list}) command.
770
771 @smallexample
772 (_GDBP__) @b{l}
773 533 xfree(rquote);
774 534
775 535 lquote = (lq == nil || *lq == '\0') ? def_lquote\
776 : xstrdup (lq);
777 536 rquote = (rq == nil || *rq == '\0') ? def_rquote\
778 : xstrdup (rq);
779 537
780 538 len_lquote = strlen(rquote);
781 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
782 540 @}
783 541
784 542 void
785 @end smallexample
786
787 @noindent
788 Let's step past the two lines that set @code{len_lquote} and
789 @code{len_rquote}, and then examine the values of those variables.
790
791 @smallexample
792 (_GDBP__) @b{n}
793 539 len_rquote = strlen(lquote);
794 (_GDBP__) @b{n}
795 540 @}
796 (_GDBP__) @b{p len_lquote}
797 $3 = 9
798 (_GDBP__) @b{p len_rquote}
799 $4 = 7
800 @end smallexample
801
802 @noindent
803 That certainly looks wrong, assuming @code{len_lquote} and
804 @code{len_rquote} are meant to be the lengths of @code{lquote} and
805 @code{rquote} respectively. Let's try setting them to better values.
806 We can use the @code{p} command for this, since it'll print the value of
807 any expression---and that expression can include subroutine calls and
808 assignments.
809
810 @smallexample
811 (_GDBP__) @b{p len_lquote=strlen(lquote)}
812 $5 = 7
813 (_GDBP__) @b{p len_rquote=strlen(rquote)}
814 $6 = 9
815 @end smallexample
816
817 @noindent
818 Let's see if that fixes the problem of using the new quotes with the
819 @code{m4} built-in @code{defn}. We can allow @code{m4} to continue
820 executing with the @code{c} (@code{continue}) command, and then try the
821 example that caused trouble initially:
822
823 @smallexample
824 (_GDBP__) @b{c}
825 Continuing.
826
827 @b{define(baz,defn(<QUOTE>foo<UNQUOTE>))}
828
829 baz
830 0000
831 @end smallexample
832
833 @noindent
834 Success! The new quotes now work just as well as the default ones. The
835 problem seems to have been just the two typos defining the wrong
836 lengths. We'll let @code{m4} exit by giving it an EOF as input.
837
838 @smallexample
839 @b{C-d}
840 Program exited normally.
841 @end smallexample
842
843 @noindent
844 The message @samp{Program exited normally.} is from _GDBN__; it
845 indicates @code{m4} has finished executing. We can end our _GDBN__
846 session with the _GDBN__ @code{quit} command.
847
848 @smallexample
849 (_GDBP__) @b{quit}
850 _1__@end smallexample
851
852 @node Invocation, Commands, Sample Session, Top
853 @chapter Getting In and Out of _GDBN__
854
855 This chapter discusses how to start _GDBN__, and how to get out of it.
856 (The essentials: type @samp{_GDBP__} to start GDB, and type @kbd{quit}
857 or @kbd{C-d} to exit.)
858
859 @menu
860 * Invoking _GDBN__:: Starting _GDBN__
861 * Leaving _GDBN__:: Leaving _GDBN__
862 * Shell Commands:: Shell Commands
863 @end menu
864
865 @node Invoking _GDBN__, Leaving _GDBN__, Invocation, Invocation
866 @section Starting _GDBN__
867
868 Start _GDBN__ with the shell command @code{_GDBP__}. Once it's running,
869 _GDBN__ reads commands from the terminal until you tell it to exit.
870
871 You can also run @code{_GDBP__} with a variety of arguments and options,
872 to specify more of your debugging environment at the outset.
873
874 The command-line options described here are designed
875 to cover a variety of situations; in some environments, some of these
876 options may effectively be unavailable.
877
878 _if__(_H8__)
879 For details on starting up _GDBP__ as a
880 remote debugger attached to a Hitachi H8/300 board, see @ref{Hitachi
881 H8/300 Remote,,_GDBN__ and the Hitachi H8/300}.
882 _fi__(_H8__)
883
884 The most usual way to start _GDBN__ is with one argument or two,
885 specifying an executable program as the argument:
886
887 @example
888 _GDBP__ @var{program}
889 @end example
890
891 @noindent
892 You can also start with both an executable program and a core file
893 specified:
894
895 @example
896 _GDBP__ @var{program} @var{core}
897 @end example
898
899 You can, instead, specify a process ID as a second argument, if you want
900 to debug a running process:
901
902 @example
903 _GDBP__ @var{program} 1234
904 @end example
905
906 @noindent
907 would attach _GDBN__ to process @code{1234} (unless you also have a file
908 named @file{1234}; _GDBN__ does check for a core file first).
909
910 Taking advantage of the second command-line argument requires a fairly
911 complete operating system; when you use _GDBN__ as a remote debugger
912 attached to a bare board, there may not be any notion of ``process'',
913 and there is often no way to get a core dump.
914
915 @noindent
916 You can further control how _GDBN__ starts up by using command-line
917 options. _GDBN__ itself can remind you of the options available.
918
919 @noindent
920 Type
921
922 @example
923 _GDBP__ -help
924 @end example
925
926 @noindent
927 to display all available options and briefly describe their use
928 (@samp{_GDBP__ -h} is a shorter equivalent).
929
930 All options and command line arguments you give are processed
931 in sequential order. The order makes a difference when the
932 @samp{-x} option is used.
933
934 @menu
935 * File Options:: Choosing Files
936 * Mode Options:: Choosing Modes
937 _if__(!_GENERIC__)
938 _include__(gdbinv-m.m4)_dnl__
939 _fi__(!_GENERIC__)
940 @end menu
941
942 @node File Options, Mode Options, Invoking _GDBN__, Invoking _GDBN__
943 @subsection Choosing Files
944
945 When _GDBN__ starts, it reads any arguments other than options as
946 specifying an executable file and core file (or process ID). This is
947 the same as if the arguments were specified by the @samp{-se} and
948 @samp{-c} options respectively. (_GDBN__ reads the first argument
949 that does not have an associated option flag as equivalent to the
950 @samp{-se} option followed by that argument; and the second argument
951 that does not have an associated option flag, if any, as equivalent to
952 the @samp{-c} option followed by that argument.)
953
954 Many options have both long and short forms; both are shown in the
955 following list. _GDBN__ also recognizes the long forms if you truncate
956 them, so long as enough of the option is present to be unambiguous.
957 (If you prefer, you can flag option arguments with @samp{--} rather
958 than @samp{-}, though we illustrate the more usual convention.)
959
960 @table @code
961 @item -symbols=@var{file}
962 @itemx -s @var{file}
963 Read symbol table from file @var{file}.
964
965 @item -exec=@var{file}
966 @itemx -e @var{file}
967 Use file @var{file} as the executable file to execute when
968 appropriate, and for examining pure data in conjunction with a core
969 dump.
970
971 @item -se=@var{file}
972 Read symbol table from file @var{file} and use it as the executable
973 file.
974
975 @item -core=@var{file}
976 @itemx -c @var{file}
977 Use file @var{file} as a core dump to examine.
978
979 @item -command=@var{file}
980 @itemx -x @var{file}
981 Execute _GDBN__ commands from file @var{file}. @xref{Command Files}.
982
983 @item -directory=@var{directory}
984 @itemx -d @var{directory}
985 Add @var{directory} to the path to search for source files.
986
987 @item -m
988 @itemx -mapped
989 @emph{Warning: this option depends on operating system facilities that are not
990 supported on all systems.}@*
991 If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the @code{mmap}
992 system call, you can use this option
993 to have _GDBN__ write the symbols from your
994 program into a reusable file in the current directory. If the program you are debugging is
995 called @file{/tmp/fred}, the mapped symbol file will be @file{./fred.syms}.
996 Future _GDBN__ debugging sessions will notice the presence of this file,
997 and will quickly map in symbol information from it, rather than reading
998 the symbol table from the executable program.
999
1000 The @file{.syms} file is specific to the host machine on which _GDBN__ is run.
1001 It holds an exact image of _GDBN__'s internal symbol table. It cannot be
1002 shared across multiple host platforms.
1003
1004 @item -r
1005 @itemx -readnow
1006 Read each symbol file's entire symbol table immediately, rather than
1007 the default, which is to read it incrementally as it is needed.
1008 This makes startup slower, but makes future operations faster.
1009 @end table
1010
1011 The @code{-mapped} and @code{-readnow} options are typically combined in order to
1012 build a @file{.syms} file that contains complete symbol information.
1013 A simple GDB invocation to do nothing but build a @file{.syms} file for future
1014 use is:
1015
1016 @example
1017 gdb -batch -nx -mapped -readnow programname
1018 @end example
1019
1020 _if__(!_GENERIC__)
1021 @node Mode Options, Mode Options, File Options, Invoking _GDBN__
1022 _fi__(!_GENERIC__)
1023 _if__(_GENERIC__)
1024 @node Mode Options, , File Options, Invoking _GDBN__
1025 _fi__(_GENERIC__)
1026 @subsection Choosing Modes
1027
1028 You can run _GDBN__ in various alternative modes---for example, in
1029 batch mode or quiet mode.
1030
1031 @table @code
1032 @item -nx
1033 @itemx -n
1034 Do not execute commands from any @file{_GDBINIT__} initialization files.
1035 Normally, the commands in these files are executed after all the
1036 command options and arguments have been processed.
1037 @xref{Command Files}.
1038
1039 @item -quiet
1040 @itemx -q
1041 ``Quiet''. Do not print the introductory and copyright messages. These
1042 messages are also suppressed in batch mode.
1043
1044 @item -batch
1045 Run in batch mode. Exit with status @code{0} after processing all the command
1046 files specified with @samp{-x} (and @file{_GDBINIT__}, if not inhibited).
1047 Exit with nonzero status if an error occurs in executing the _GDBN__
1048 commands in the command files.
1049
1050 Batch mode may be useful for running _GDBN__ as a filter, for example to
1051 download and run a program on another computer; in order to make this
1052 more useful, the message
1053
1054 @example
1055 Program exited normally.
1056 @end example
1057
1058 @noindent
1059 (which is ordinarily issued whenever a program running under _GDBN__ control
1060 terminates) is not issued when running in batch mode.
1061
1062 @item -cd=@var{directory}
1063 Run _GDBN__ using @var{directory} as its working directory,
1064 instead of the current directory.
1065
1066 _if__(_LUCID__)
1067 @item -context @var{authentication}
1068 When the Energize programming system starts up _GDBN__, it uses this
1069 option to trigger an alternate mode of interaction.
1070 @var{authentication} is a pair of numeric codes that identify _GDBN__
1071 as a client in the Energize environment. Avoid this option when you run
1072 _GDBN__ directly from the command line. See @ref{Energize,,Using
1073 _GDBN__ with Energize} for more discussion of using _GDBN__ with Energize.
1074 _fi__(_LUCID__)
1075
1076 @item -fullname
1077 @itemx -f
1078 Emacs sets this option when it runs _GDBN__ as a subprocess. It tells _GDBN__
1079 to output the full file name and line number in a standard,
1080 recognizable fashion each time a stack frame is displayed (which
1081 includes each time your program stops). This recognizable format looks
1082 like two @samp{\032} characters, followed by the file name, line number
1083 and character position separated by colons, and a newline. The
1084 Emacs-to-_GDBN__ interface program uses the two @samp{\032} characters as
1085 a signal to display the source code for the frame.
1086
1087 @item -b @var{bps}
1088 Set the line speed (baud rate or bits per second) of any serial
1089 interface used by _GDBN__ for remote debugging.
1090
1091 @item -tty=@var{device}
1092 Run using @var{device} for your program's standard input and output.
1093 @c FIXME: kingdon thinks there is more to -tty. Investigate.
1094 @end table
1095
1096 _if__(!_GENERIC__)
1097 _include__(gdbinv-s.m4)
1098 _fi__(!_GENERIC__)
1099 @node Leaving _GDBN__, Shell Commands, Invoking _GDBN__, Invocation
1100 @section Leaving _GDBN__
1101 @cindex exiting _GDBN__
1102
1103 @table @code
1104 @item quit
1105 @kindex quit
1106 @kindex q
1107 To exit _GDBN__, use the @code{quit} command (abbreviated @code{q}), or type
1108 an end-of-file character (usually @kbd{C-d}).
1109 @end table
1110
1111 @cindex interrupt
1112 An interrupt (often @kbd{C-c}) will not exit from _GDBN__, but rather
1113 will terminate the action of any _GDBN__ command that is in progress and
1114 return to _GDBN__ command level. It is safe to type the interrupt
1115 character at any time because _GDBN__ does not allow it to take effect
1116 until a time when it is safe.
1117
1118 If you have been using _GDBN__ to control an attached process or device, you
1119 can release it with the @code{detach} command; @pxref{Attach,
1120 ,Debugging an Already-Running Process}..
1121
1122 @node Shell Commands, , Leaving _GDBN__, Invocation
1123 @section Shell Commands
1124
1125 If you need to execute occasional shell commands during your
1126 debugging session, there is no need to leave or suspend _GDBN__; you can
1127 just use the @code{shell} command.
1128
1129 @table @code
1130 @item shell @var{command string}
1131 @kindex shell
1132 @cindex shell escape
1133 Directs _GDBN__ to invoke an inferior shell to execute @var{command
1134 string}. If it exists, the environment variable @code{SHELL} is used
1135 for the name of the shell to run. Otherwise _GDBN__ uses
1136 @code{/bin/sh}.
1137 @end table
1138
1139 The utility @code{make} is often needed in development environments.
1140 You do not have to use the @code{shell} command for this purpose in _GDBN__:
1141
1142 @table @code
1143 @item make @var{make-args}
1144 @kindex make
1145 @cindex calling make
1146 Causes _GDBN__ to execute an inferior @code{make} program with the specified
1147 arguments. This is equivalent to @samp{shell make @var{make-args}}.
1148 @end table
1149
1150 @node Commands, Running, Invocation, Top
1151 @chapter _GDBN__ Commands
1152
1153 You can abbreviate a _GDBN__ command to the first few letters of the command
1154 name, if that abbreviation is unambiguous; and you can repeat certain
1155 _GDBN__ commands by typing just @key{RET}. You can also use the @key{TAB}
1156 key to get _GDBN__ to fill out the rest of a word in a command (or to
1157 show you the alternatives available, if there's more than one possibility).
1158
1159 @menu
1160 * Command Syntax:: Command Syntax
1161 * Completion:: Command Completion
1162 * Help:: Getting Help
1163 @end menu
1164
1165 @node Command Syntax, Completion, Commands, Commands
1166 @section Command Syntax
1167
1168 A _GDBN__ command is a single line of input. There is no limit on how long
1169 it can be. It starts with a command name, which is followed by arguments
1170 whose meaning depends on the command name. For example, the command
1171 @code{step} accepts an argument which is the number of times to step,
1172 as in @samp{step 5}. You can also use the @code{step} command with
1173 no arguments. Some command names do not allow any arguments.
1174
1175 @cindex abbreviation
1176 _GDBN__ command names may always be truncated if that abbreviation is
1177 unambiguous. Other possible command abbreviations are listed in the
1178 documentation for individual commands. In some cases, even ambiguous
1179 abbreviations are allowed; for example, @code{s} is specially defined as
1180 equivalent to @code{step} even though there are other commands whose
1181 names start with @code{s}. You can test abbreviations by using them as
1182 arguments to the @code{help} command.
1183
1184 @cindex repeating commands
1185 @kindex RET
1186 A blank line as input to _GDBN__ (typing just @key{RET}) means to
1187 repeat the previous command. Certain commands (for example, @code{run})
1188 will not repeat this way; these are commands for which unintentional
1189 repetition might cause trouble and which you are unlikely to want to
1190 repeat.
1191
1192 The @code{list} and @code{x} commands, when you repeat them with
1193 @key{RET}, construct new arguments rather than repeating
1194 exactly as typed. This permits easy scanning of source or memory.
1195
1196 _GDBN__ can also use @key{RET} in another way: to partition lengthy
1197 output, in a way similar to the common utility @code{more}
1198 (@pxref{Screen Size}). Since it is easy to press one @key{RET} too many
1199 in this situation, _GDBN__ disables command repetition after any command
1200 that generates this sort of display.
1201
1202 @kindex #
1203 @cindex comment
1204 A line of input starting with @kbd{#} is a comment; it does nothing.
1205 This is useful mainly in command files (@pxref{Command Files}).
1206
1207 @node Completion, Help, Command Syntax, Commands
1208 @section Command Completion
1209
1210 @cindex completion
1211 @cindex word completion
1212 _GDBN__ can fill in the rest of a word in a command for you, if there's
1213 only one possibility; it can also show you what the valid possibilities
1214 are for the next word in a command, at any time. This works for _GDBN__
1215 commands, _GDBN__ subcommands, and the names of symbols in your program.
1216
1217 Press the @key{TAB} key whenever you want _GDBN__ to fill out the rest
1218 of a word. If there's only one possibility, _GDBN__ will fill in the
1219 word, and wait for you to finish the command (or press @key{RET} to
1220 enter it). For example, if you type
1221
1222 @c FIXME "@key" doesn't distinguish its argument sufficiently to permit
1223 @c complete accuracy in these examples; space introduced for clarity.
1224 @c If texinfo enhancements make it unnecessary, it would be nice to
1225 @c replace " @key" by "@key" in the following...
1226 @example
1227 (_GDBP__) info bre @key{TAB}
1228 @end example
1229
1230 @noindent
1231 _GDBN__ fills in the rest of the word @samp{breakpoints}, since that's
1232 the only @code{info} subcommand beginning with @samp{bre}:
1233
1234 @example
1235 (_GDBP__) info breakpoints
1236 @end example
1237
1238 @noindent
1239 You can either press @key{RET} at this point, to run the @code{info
1240 breakpoints} command, or backspace and enter something else, if
1241 @samp{breakpoints} doesn't look like the command you expected. (If you
1242 were sure you wanted @code{info breakpoints} in the first place, you
1243 might as well just type @key{RET} immediately after @samp{info bre},
1244 to exploit command abbreviations rather than command completion).
1245
1246 If there is more than one possibility for the next word when you press
1247 @key{TAB}, _GDBN__ will sound a bell. You can either supply more
1248 characters and try again, or just press @key{TAB} a second time, and
1249 _GDBN__ will display all the possible completions for that word. For
1250 example, you might want to set a breakpoint on a subroutine whose name
1251 begins with @samp{make_}, but when you type @kbd{b make_@key{TAB}} _GDBN__
1252 just sounds the bell. Typing @key{TAB} again will display all the
1253 function names in your program that begin with those characters, for
1254 example:
1255
1256 @example
1257 (_GDBP__) b make_ @key{TAB}
1258 @exdent _GDBN__ sounds bell; press @key{TAB} again, to see:
1259 make_a_section_from_file make_environ
1260 make_abs_section make_function_type
1261 make_blockvector make_pointer_type
1262 make_cleanup make_reference_type
1263 make_command make_symbol_completion_list
1264 (GDBP__) b make_
1265 @end example
1266
1267 @noindent
1268 After displaying the available possibilities, _GDBN__ copies your
1269 partial input (@samp{b make_} in the example) so you can finish the
1270 command.
1271
1272 If you just want to see the list of alternatives in the first place, you
1273 can press @kbd{M-?} rather than pressing @key{TAB} twice. @kbd{M-?}
1274 means @kbd{@key{META} ?}. You can type this either by holding down a
1275 key designated as the @key{META} shift on your keyboard (if there is
1276 one) while typing @kbd{?}, or by typing @key{ESC} followed by @kbd{?}.
1277
1278 @cindex quotes in commands
1279 @cindex completion of quoted strings
1280 Sometimes the string you need, while logically a ``word'', may contain
1281 parentheses or other characters that _GDBN__ normally excludes from its
1282 notion of a word. To permit word completion to work in this situation,
1283 you may enclose words in @code{'} (single quote marks) in _GDBN__ commands.
1284
1285 The most likely situation where you might need this is in typing the
1286 name of a C++ function. This is because C++ allows function overloading
1287 (multiple definitions of the same function, distinguished by argument
1288 type). For example, when you want to set a breakpoint you may need to
1289 distinguish whether you mean the version of @code{name} that takes an
1290 @code{int} parameter, @code{name(int)}, or the version that takes a
1291 @code{float} parameter, @code{name(float)}. To use the word-completion
1292 facilities in this situation, type a single quote @code{'} at the
1293 beginning of the function name. This alerts _GDBN__ that it may need to
1294 consider more information than usual when you press @key{TAB} or
1295 @kbd{M-?} to request word completion:
1296
1297 @example
1298 (_GDBP__) b 'bubble( @key{M-?}
1299 bubble(double,double) bubble(int,int)
1300 (_GDBP__) b 'bubble(
1301 @end example
1302
1303 In some cases, _GDBN__ can tell that completing a name will require
1304 quotes. When this happens, _GDBN__ will insert the quote for you (while
1305 completing as much as it can) if you do not type the quote in the first
1306 place:
1307
1308 @example
1309 (_GDBP__) b bub @key{TAB}
1310 @exdent _GDBN__ alters your input line to the following, and rings a bell:
1311 (_GDBP__) b 'bubble(
1312 @end example
1313
1314 @noindent
1315 In general, _GDBN__ can tell that a quote is needed (and inserts it) if
1316 you have not yet started typing the argument list when you ask for
1317 completion on an overloaded symbol.
1318
1319
1320 @node Help, , Completion, Commands
1321 @section Getting Help
1322 @cindex online documentation
1323 @kindex help
1324
1325 You can always ask _GDBN__ itself for information on its commands, using the
1326 command @code{help}.
1327
1328 @table @code
1329 @item help
1330 @itemx h
1331 @kindex h
1332 You can use @code{help} (abbreviated @code{h}) with no arguments to
1333 display a short list of named classes of commands:
1334
1335 @smallexample
1336 (_GDBP__) help
1337 List of classes of commands:
1338
1339 running -- Running the program
1340 stack -- Examining the stack
1341 data -- Examining data
1342 breakpoints -- Making program stop at certain points
1343 files -- Specifying and examining files
1344 status -- Status inquiries
1345 support -- Support facilities
1346 user-defined -- User-defined commands
1347 aliases -- Aliases of other commands
1348 obscure -- Obscure features
1349
1350 Type "help" followed by a class name for a list of
1351 commands in that class.
1352 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1353 documentation.
1354 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1355 (_GDBP__)
1356 @end smallexample
1357
1358 @item help @var{class}
1359 Using one of the general help classes as an argument, you can get a
1360 list of the individual commands in that class. For example, here is the
1361 help display for the class @code{status}:
1362
1363 @smallexample
1364 (_GDBP__) help status
1365 Status inquiries.
1366
1367 List of commands:
1368
1369 show -- Generic command for showing things set with "set"
1370 info -- Generic command for printing status
1371
1372 Type "help" followed by command name for full
1373 documentation.
1374 Command name abbreviations are allowed if unambiguous.
1375 (_GDBP__)
1376 @end smallexample
1377
1378 @item help @var{command}
1379 With a command name as @code{help} argument, _GDBN__ will display a
1380 short paragraph on how to use that command.
1381 @end table
1382
1383 In addition to @code{help}, you can use the _GDBN__ commands @code{info}
1384 and @code{show} to inquire about the state of your program, or the state
1385 of _GDBN__ itself. Each command supports many topics of inquiry; this
1386 manual introduces each of them in the appropriate context. The listings
1387 under @code{info} and under @code{show} in the Index point to
1388 all the sub-commands. @xref{Index}.
1389
1390 @c @group
1391 @table @code
1392 @item info
1393 @kindex info
1394 @kindex i
1395 This command (abbreviated @code{i}) is for describing the state of your
1396 program; for example, it can list the arguments given to your program
1397 (@code{info args}), the registers currently in use (@code{info
1398 registers}), or the breakpoints you have set (@code{info breakpoints}).
1399 You can get a complete list of the @code{info} sub-commands with
1400 @w{@code{help info}}.
1401
1402 @kindex show
1403 @item show
1404 In contrast, @code{show} is for describing the state of _GDBN__ itself.
1405 You can change most of the things you can @code{show}, by using the
1406 related command @code{set}; for example, you can control what number
1407 system is used for displays with @code{set radix}, or simply inquire
1408 which is currently in use with @code{show radix}.
1409
1410 @kindex info set
1411 To display all the settable parameters and their current
1412 values, you can use @code{show} with no arguments; you may also use
1413 @code{info set}. Both commands produce the same display.
1414 @c FIXME: "info set" violates the rule that "info" is for state of
1415 @c FIXME...program. Ck w/ GNU: "info set" to be called something else,
1416 @c FIXME...or change desc of rule---eg "state of prog and debugging session"?
1417 @end table
1418 @c @end group
1419
1420 Here are three miscellaneous @code{show} subcommands, all of which are
1421 exceptional in lacking corresponding @code{set} commands:
1422
1423 @table @code
1424 @kindex show version
1425 @cindex version number
1426 @item show version
1427 Show what version of _GDBN__ is running. You should include this
1428 information in _GDBN__ bug-reports. If multiple versions of _GDBN__ are in
1429 use at your site, you may occasionally want to make sure what version
1430 of _GDBN__ you are running; as _GDBN__ evolves, new commands are introduced,
1431 and old ones may wither away. The version number is also announced
1432 when you start _GDBN__ with no arguments.
1433
1434 @kindex show copying
1435 @item show copying
1436 Display information about permission for copying _GDBN__.
1437
1438 @kindex show warranty
1439 @item show warranty
1440 Display the GNU ``NO WARRANTY'' statement.
1441 @end table
1442
1443 @node Running, Stopping, Commands, Top
1444 @chapter Running Programs Under _GDBN__
1445
1446 To debug a program, you must run it under _GDBN__.
1447
1448 @menu
1449 * Compilation:: Compiling for Debugging
1450 * Starting:: Starting your Program
1451 * Arguments:: Your Program's Arguments
1452 * Environment:: Your Program's Environment
1453 * Working Directory:: Your Program's Working Directory
1454 * Input/Output:: Your Program's Input and Output
1455 * Attach:: Debugging an Already-Running Process
1456 * Kill Process:: Killing the Child Process
1457 * Process Information:: Additional Process Information
1458 @end menu
1459
1460 @node Compilation, Starting, Running, Running
1461 @section Compiling for Debugging
1462
1463 In order to debug a program effectively, you need to generate
1464 debugging information when you compile it. This debugging information
1465 is stored in the object file; it describes the data type of each
1466 variable or function and the correspondence between source line numbers
1467 and addresses in the executable code.
1468
1469 To request debugging information, specify the @samp{-g} option when you run
1470 the compiler.
1471
1472 Many C compilers are unable to handle the @samp{-g} and @samp{-O}
1473 options together. Using those compilers, you cannot generate optimized
1474 executables containing debugging information.
1475
1476 _GCC__, the GNU C compiler, supports @samp{-g} with or without
1477 @samp{-O}, making it possible to debug optimized code. We recommend
1478 that you @emph{always} use @samp{-g} whenever you compile a program.
1479 You may think your program is correct, but there is no sense in pushing
1480 your luck.
1481
1482 @cindex optimized code, debugging
1483 @cindex debugging optimized code
1484 When you debug a program compiled with @samp{-g -O}, remember that the
1485 optimizer is rearranging your code; the debugger will show you what's
1486 really there. Don't be too surprised when the execution path doesn't
1487 exactly match your source file! An extreme example: if you define a
1488 variable, but never use it, _GDBN__ will never see that
1489 variable---because the compiler optimizes it out of existence.
1490
1491 Some things do not work as well with @samp{-g -O} as with just
1492 @samp{-g}, particularly on machines with instruction scheduling. If in
1493 doubt, recompile with @samp{-g} alone, and if this fixes the problem,
1494 please report it as a bug (including a test case!).
1495
1496 Older versions of the GNU C compiler permitted a variant option
1497 @w{@samp{-gg}} for debugging information. _GDBN__ no longer supports this
1498 format; if your GNU C compiler has this option, do not use it.
1499
1500 @ignore
1501 @comment As far as I know, there are no cases in which _GDBN__ will
1502 @comment produce strange output in this case. (but no promises).
1503 If your program includes archives made with the @code{ar} program, and
1504 if the object files used as input to @code{ar} were compiled without the
1505 @samp{-g} option and have names longer than 15 characters, _GDBN__ will get
1506 confused reading your program's symbol table. No error message will be
1507 given, but _GDBN__ may behave strangely. The reason for this problem is a
1508 deficiency in the Unix archive file format, which cannot represent file
1509 names longer than 15 characters.
1510
1511 To avoid this problem, compile the archive members with the @samp{-g}
1512 option or use shorter file names. Alternatively, use a version of GNU
1513 @code{ar} dated more recently than August 1989.
1514 @end ignore
1515
1516 @node Starting, Arguments, Compilation, Running
1517 @section Starting your Program
1518 @cindex starting
1519 @cindex running
1520
1521 @table @code
1522 @item run
1523 @itemx r
1524 @kindex run
1525 Use the @code{run} command to start your program under _GDBN__. You must
1526 first specify the program name
1527 _if__(_VXWORKS__)
1528 (except on VxWorks)
1529 _fi__(_VXWORKS__)
1530 with an argument to
1531 _GDBN__ (@pxref{Invocation, ,Getting In and Out of _GDBN__}), or by using the
1532 @code{file} or @code{exec-file} command (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to
1533 Specify Files}).
1534
1535 @end table
1536
1537 If you are running your program in an execution environment that
1538 supports processes, @code{run} creates an inferior process and makes
1539 that process run your program. (In environments without processes,
1540 @code{run} jumps to the start of your program.)
1541
1542 The execution of a program is affected by certain information it
1543 receives from its superior. _GDBN__ provides ways to specify this
1544 information, which you must do @emph{before} starting your program. (You
1545 can change it after starting your program, but such changes will only affect
1546 your program the next time you start it.) This information may be
1547 divided into four categories:
1548
1549 @table @asis
1550 @item The @emph{arguments.}
1551 Specify the arguments to give your program as the arguments of the
1552 @code{run} command. If a shell is available on your target, the shell
1553 is used to pass the arguments, so that you may use normal conventions
1554 (such as wildcard expansion or variable substitution) in describing
1555 the arguments. In Unix systems, you can control which shell is used
1556 with the @code{SHELL} environment variable. @xref{Arguments, ,Your
1557 Program's Arguments}.
1558
1559 @item The @emph{environment.}
1560 Your program normally inherits its environment from _GDBN__, but you can
1561 use the _GDBN__ commands @code{set environment} and @code{unset
1562 environment} to change parts of the environment that will be given to
1563 your program. @xref{Environment, ,Your Program's Environment}.
1564
1565 @item The @emph{working directory.}
1566 Your program inherits its working directory from _GDBN__. You can set
1567 _GDBN__'s working directory with the @code{cd} command in _GDBN__.
1568 @xref{Working Directory, ,Your Program's Working Directory}.
1569
1570 @item The @emph{standard input and output.}
1571 Your program normally uses the same device for standard input and
1572 standard output as _GDBN__ is using. You can redirect input and output
1573 in the @code{run} command line, or you can use the @code{tty} command to
1574 set a different device for your program.
1575 @xref{Input/Output, ,Your Program's Input and Output}.
1576
1577 @cindex pipes
1578 @emph{Warning:} While input and output redirection work, you cannot use
1579 pipes to pass the output of the program you are debugging to another
1580 program; if you attempt this, _GDBN__ is likely to wind up debugging the
1581 wrong program.
1582 @end table
1583
1584 @c FIXME: Rewrite following paragraph, especially its third sentence.
1585 When you issue the @code{run} command, your program begins to execute
1586 immediately. @xref{Stopping, ,Stopping and Continuing}, for
1587 discussion of how to arrange for your program to stop. Once your
1588 program has been started by the @code{run} command (and then stopped),
1589 you may evaluate expressions that involve calls to functions in your
1590 program, using the @code{print} or @code{call} commands. @xref{Data,
1591 ,Examining Data}.
1592
1593 If the modification time of your symbol file has changed since the
1594 last time _GDBN__ read its symbols, _GDBN__ will discard its symbol table and
1595 re-read it. When it does this, _GDBN__ tries to retain your current
1596 breakpoints.
1597
1598 @node Arguments, Environment, Starting, Running
1599 @section Your Program's Arguments
1600
1601 @cindex arguments (to your program)
1602 The arguments to your program can be specified by the arguments of the
1603 @code{run} command. They are passed to a shell, which expands wildcard
1604 characters and performs redirection of I/O, and thence to your program.
1605 _GDBN__ uses the shell indicated by your environment variable
1606 @code{SHELL} if it exists; otherwise, _GDBN__ uses @code{/bin/sh}.
1607
1608 @code{run} with no arguments uses the same arguments used by the previous
1609 @code{run}, or those set by the @code{set args} command.
1610
1611 @kindex set args
1612 @table @code
1613 @item set args
1614 Specify the arguments to be used the next time your program is run. If
1615 @code{set args} has no arguments, @code{run} will execute your program
1616 with no arguments. Once you have run your program with arguments,
1617 using @code{set args} before the next @code{run} is the only way to run
1618 it again without arguments.
1619
1620 @item show args
1621 @kindex show args
1622 Show the arguments to give your program when it is started.
1623 @end table
1624
1625 @node Environment, Working Directory, Arguments, Running
1626 @section Your Program's Environment
1627
1628 @cindex environment (of your program)
1629 The @dfn{environment} consists of a set of environment variables and
1630 their values. Environment variables conventionally record such things as
1631 your user name, your home directory, your terminal type, and your search
1632 path for programs to run. Usually you set up environment variables with
1633 the shell and they are inherited by all the other programs you run. When
1634 debugging, it can be useful to try running your program with a modified
1635 environment without having to start _GDBN__ over again.
1636
1637 @table @code
1638 @item path @var{directory}
1639 @kindex path
1640 Add @var{directory} to the front of the @code{PATH} environment variable
1641 (the search path for executables), for both _GDBN__ and your program.
1642 You may specify several directory names, separated by @samp{:} or
1643 whitespace. If @var{directory} is already in the path, it is moved to
1644 the front, so it will be searched sooner.
1645
1646 You can use the string @samp{$cwd} to refer to whatever is the current
1647 working directory at the time _GDBN__ searches the path. If you use
1648 @samp{.} instead, it refers to the directory where you executed the
1649 @code{path} command. _GDBN__ fills in the current path where needed in
1650 the @var{directory} argument, before adding it to the search path.
1651 @c 'path' is explicitly nonrepeatable, but RMS points out it is silly to
1652 @c document that, since repeating it would be a no-op.
1653
1654 @item show paths
1655 @kindex show paths
1656 Display the list of search paths for executables (the @code{PATH}
1657 environment variable).
1658
1659 @item show environment @r{[}@var{varname}@r{]}
1660 @kindex show environment
1661 Print the value of environment variable @var{varname} to be given to
1662 your program when it starts. If you do not supply @var{varname},
1663 print the names and values of all environment variables to be given to
1664 your program. You can abbreviate @code{environment} as @code{env}.
1665
1666 @item set environment @var{varname} @r{[}=@r{]} @var{value}
1667 @kindex set environment
1668 Sets environment variable @var{varname} to @var{value}. The value
1669 changes for your program only, not for _GDBN__ itself. @var{value} may
1670 be any string; the values of environment variables are just strings, and
1671 any interpretation is supplied by your program itself. The @var{value}
1672 parameter is optional; if it is eliminated, the variable is set to a
1673 null value.
1674 @c "any string" here does not include leading, trailing
1675 @c blanks. Gnu asks: does anyone care?
1676
1677 For example, this command:
1678
1679 @example
1680 set env USER = foo
1681 @end example
1682
1683 @noindent
1684 tells a Unix program, when subsequently run, that its user is named
1685 @samp{foo}. (The spaces around @samp{=} are used for clarity here; they
1686 are not actually required.)
1687
1688 @item unset environment @var{varname}
1689 @kindex unset environment
1690 Remove variable @var{varname} from the environment to be passed to your
1691 program. This is different from @samp{set env @var{varname} =};
1692 @code{unset environment} removes the variable from the environment,
1693 rather than assigning it an empty value.
1694 @end table
1695
1696 @node Working Directory, Input/Output, Environment, Running
1697 @section Your Program's Working Directory
1698
1699 @cindex working directory (of your program)
1700 Each time you start your program with @code{run}, it inherits its
1701 working directory from the current working directory of _GDBN__. _GDBN__'s
1702 working directory is initially whatever it inherited from its parent
1703 process (typically the shell), but you can specify a new working
1704 directory in _GDBN__ with the @code{cd} command.
1705
1706 The _GDBN__ working directory also serves as a default for the commands
1707 that specify files for _GDBN__ to operate on. @xref{Files, ,Commands to
1708 Specify Files}.
1709
1710 @table @code
1711 @item cd @var{directory}
1712 @kindex cd
1713 Set _GDBN__'s working directory to @var{directory}.
1714
1715 @item pwd
1716 @kindex pwd
1717 Print _GDBN__'s working directory.
1718 @end table
1719
1720 @node Input/Output, Attach, Working Directory, Running
1721 @section Your Program's Input and Output
1722
1723 @cindex redirection
1724 @cindex i/o
1725 @cindex terminal
1726 By default, the program you run under _GDBN__ does input and output to
1727 the same terminal that _GDBN__ uses. _GDBN__ switches the terminal to
1728 its own terminal modes to interact with you, but it records the terminal
1729 modes your program was using and switches back to them when you continue
1730 running your program.
1731
1732 @table @code
1733 @item info terminal
1734 @kindex info terminal
1735 Displays _GDBN__'s recorded information about the terminal modes your
1736 program is using.
1737 @end table
1738
1739 You can redirect your program's input and/or output using shell
1740 redirection with the @code{run} command. For example,
1741
1742 _0__@example
1743 run > outfile
1744 _1__@end example
1745
1746 @noindent
1747 starts your program, diverting its output to the file @file{outfile}.
1748
1749 @kindex tty
1750 @cindex controlling terminal
1751 Another way to specify where your program should do input and output is
1752 with the @code{tty} command. This command accepts a file name as
1753 argument, and causes this file to be the default for future @code{run}
1754 commands. It also resets the controlling terminal for the child
1755 process, for future @code{run} commands. For example,
1756
1757 @example
1758 tty /dev/ttyb
1759 @end example
1760
1761 @noindent
1762 directs that processes started with subsequent @code{run} commands
1763 default to do input and output on the terminal @file{/dev/ttyb} and have
1764 that as their controlling terminal.
1765
1766 An explicit redirection in @code{run} overrides the @code{tty} command's
1767 effect on the input/output device, but not its effect on the controlling
1768 terminal.
1769
1770 When you use the @code{tty} command or redirect input in the @code{run}
1771 command, only the input @emph{for your program} is affected. The input
1772 for _GDBN__ still comes from your terminal.
1773
1774 @node Attach, Kill Process, Input/Output, Running
1775 @section Debugging an Already-Running Process
1776 @kindex attach
1777 @cindex attach
1778
1779 @table @code
1780 @item attach @var{process-id}
1781 This command
1782 attaches to a running process---one that was started outside _GDBN__.
1783 (@code{info files} will show your active targets.) The command takes as
1784 argument a process ID. The usual way to find out the process-id of
1785 a Unix process is with the @code{ps} utility, or with the @samp{jobs -l}
1786 shell command.
1787
1788 @code{attach} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} a second time after
1789 executing the command.
1790 @end table
1791
1792 To use @code{attach}, you must be debugging in an environment which
1793 supports processes. You must also have permission to send the process a
1794 signal, and it must have the same effective user ID as the _GDBN__
1795 process.
1796
1797 When using @code{attach}, you should first use the @code{file} command
1798 to specify the program running in the process and load its symbol table.
1799 @xref{Files, ,Commands to Specify Files}.
1800
1801 The first thing _GDBN__ does after arranging to debug the specified
1802 process is to stop it. You can examine and modify an attached process
1803 with all the _GDBN__ commands that are ordinarily available when you start
1804 processes with @code{run}. You can insert breakpoints; you can step and
1805 continue; you can modify storage. If you would rather the process
1806 continue running, you may use the @code{continue} command after
1807 attaching _GDBN__ to the process.
1808
1809 @table @code
1810 @item detach
1811 @kindex detach
1812 When you have finished debugging the attached process, you can use the
1813 @code{detach} command to release it from _GDBN__'s control. Detaching
1814 the process continues its execution. After the @code{detach} command,
1815 that process and _GDBN__ become completely independent once more, and you
1816 are ready to @code{attach} another process or start one with @code{run}.
1817 @code{detach} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
1818 executing the command.
1819 @end table
1820
1821 If you exit _GDBN__ or use the @code{run} command while you have an attached
1822 process, you kill that process. By default, you will be asked for
1823 confirmation if you try to do either of these things; you can control
1824 whether or not you need to confirm by using the @code{set confirm} command
1825 (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional Warnings and Messages}).
1826
1827 @node Kill Process, Process Information, Attach, Running
1828 @c @group
1829 @section Killing the Child Process
1830
1831 @table @code
1832 @item kill
1833 @kindex kill
1834 Kill the child process in which your program is running under _GDBN__.
1835 @end table
1836
1837 This command is useful if you wish to debug a core dump instead of a
1838 running process. _GDBN__ ignores any core dump file while your program
1839 is running.
1840 @c @end group
1841
1842 On some operating systems, a program cannot be executed outside _GDBN__
1843 while you have breakpoints set on it inside _GDBN__. You can use the
1844 @code{kill} command in this situation to permit running your program
1845 outside the debugger.
1846
1847 The @code{kill} command is also useful if you wish to recompile and
1848 relink your program, since on many systems it is impossible to modify an
1849 executable file while it is running in a process. In this case, when you
1850 next type @code{run}, _GDBN__ will notice that the file has changed, and
1851 will re-read the symbol table (while trying to preserve your current
1852 breakpoint settings).
1853
1854 @node Process Information, , Kill Process, Running
1855 @section Additional Process Information
1856
1857 @kindex /proc
1858 @cindex process image
1859 Some operating systems provide a facility called @samp{/proc} that can
1860 be used to examine the image of a running process using file-system
1861 subroutines. If _GDBN__ is configured for an operating system with this
1862 facility, the command @code{info proc} is available to report on several
1863 kinds of information about the process running your program.
1864
1865 @table @code
1866 @item info proc
1867 @kindex info proc
1868 Summarize available information about the process.
1869
1870 @item info proc mappings
1871 @kindex info proc mappings
1872 Report on the address ranges accessible in the program, with information
1873 on whether your program may read, write, or execute each range.
1874
1875 @item info proc times
1876 @kindex info proc times
1877 Starting time, user CPU time, and system CPU time for your program and
1878 its children.
1879
1880 @item info proc id
1881 @kindex info proc id
1882 Report on the process ID's related to your program: its own process id,
1883 the id of its parent, the process group id, and the session id.
1884
1885 @item info proc status
1886 @kindex info proc status
1887 General information on the state of the process. If the process is
1888 stopped, this report includes the reason for stopping, and any signal
1889 received.
1890
1891 @item info proc all
1892 Show all the above information about the process.
1893 @end table
1894
1895 @node Stopping, Stack, Running, Top
1896 @chapter Stopping and Continuing
1897
1898 The principal purpose of using a debugger is so that you can stop your
1899 program before it terminates; or so that, if your program runs into
1900 trouble, you can investigate and find out why.
1901
1902 Inside _GDBN__, your program may stop for any of several reasons, such
1903 as a signal, a breakpoint, or reaching a new line after a _GDBN__
1904 command such as @code{step}. You may then examine and change
1905 variables, set new breakpoints or remove old ones, and then continue
1906 execution. Usually, the messages shown by _GDBN__ provide ample
1907 explanation of the status of your program---but you can also explicitly
1908 request this information at any time.
1909
1910 @table @code
1911 @item info program
1912 @kindex info program
1913 Display information about the status of your program: whether it is
1914 running or not, what process it is, and why it stopped.
1915 @end table
1916
1917 @menu
1918 * Breakpoints:: Breakpoints, Watchpoints, and Exceptions
1919 * Continuing and Stepping:: Resuming Execution
1920 * Signals:: Signals
1921 @end menu
1922
1923 @node Breakpoints, Continuing and Stepping, Stopping, Stopping
1924 @section Breakpoints, Watchpoints, and Exceptions
1925
1926 @cindex breakpoints
1927 A @dfn{breakpoint} makes your program stop whenever a certain point in
1928 the program is reached. For each breakpoint, you can add various
1929 conditions to control in finer detail whether your program will stop.
1930 You can set breakpoints with the @code{break} command and its variants
1931 (@pxref{Set Breaks, ,Setting Breakpoints}), to specify the place where
1932 your program should stop by line number, function name or exact address
1933 in the program. In languages with exception handling (such as GNU
1934 C++), you can also set breakpoints where an exception is raised
1935 (@pxref{Exception Handling, ,Breakpoints and Exceptions}).
1936
1937 @cindex watchpoints
1938 @cindex memory tracing
1939 @cindex breakpoint on memory address
1940 @cindex breakpoint on variable modification
1941 A @dfn{watchpoint} is a special breakpoint that stops your program
1942 when the value of an expression changes. You must use a different
1943 command to set watchpoints (@pxref{Set Watchpoints, ,Setting
1944 Watchpoints}), but aside from that, you can manage a watchpoint like
1945 any other breakpoint: you enable, disable, and delete both breakpoints
1946 and watchpoints using the same commands.
1947
1948 @cindex breakpoint numbers
1949 @cindex numbers for breakpoints
1950 _GDBN__ assigns a number to each breakpoint or watchpoint when you
1951 create it; these numbers are successive integers starting with one. In
1952 many of the commands for controlling various features of breakpoints you
1953 use the breakpoint number to say which breakpoint you want to change.
1954 Each breakpoint may be @dfn{enabled} or @dfn{disabled}; if disabled, it has
1955 no effect on your program until you enable it again.
1956
1957 @menu
1958 * Set Breaks:: Setting Breakpoints
1959 * Set Watchpoints:: Setting Watchpoints
1960 * Exception Handling:: Breakpoints and Exceptions
1961 * Delete Breaks:: Deleting Breakpoints
1962 * Disabling:: Disabling Breakpoints
1963 * Conditions:: Break Conditions
1964 * Break Commands:: Breakpoint Command Lists
1965 * Breakpoint Menus:: Breakpoint Menus
1966 * Error in Breakpoints::
1967 @end menu
1968
1969 @node Set Breaks, Set Watchpoints, Breakpoints, Breakpoints
1970 @subsection Setting Breakpoints
1971
1972 @c FIXME LMB what does GDB do if no code on line of breakpt?
1973 @c consider in particular declaration with/without initialization.
1974 @c
1975 @c FIXME 2 is there stuff on this already? break at fun start, already init?
1976
1977 @kindex break
1978 @kindex b
1979 @kindex $bpnum
1980 @cindex latest breakpoint
1981 Breakpoints are set with the @code{break} command (abbreviated
1982 @code{b}). The debugger convenience variable @samp{$bpnum} records the
1983 number of the beakpoint you've set most recently; see @ref{Convenience
1984 Vars,, Convenience Variables}, for a discussion of what you can do with
1985 convenience variables.
1986
1987 You have several ways to say where the breakpoint should go.
1988
1989 @table @code
1990 @item break @var{function}
1991 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function}. When using source
1992 languages that permit overloading of symbols, such as C++,
1993 @var{function} may refer to more than one possible place to break.
1994 @xref{Breakpoint Menus}, for a discussion of that situation.
1995
1996 @item break +@var{offset}
1997 @itemx break -@var{offset}
1998 Set a breakpoint some number of lines forward or back from the position
1999 at which execution stopped in the currently selected frame.
2000
2001 @item break @var{linenum}
2002 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in the current source file.
2003 That file is the last file whose source text was printed. This
2004 breakpoint will stop your program just before it executes any of the
2005 code on that line.
2006
2007 @item break @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
2008 Set a breakpoint at line @var{linenum} in source file @var{filename}.
2009
2010 @item break @var{filename}:@var{function}
2011 Set a breakpoint at entry to function @var{function} found in file
2012 @var{filename}. Specifying a file name as well as a function name is
2013 superfluous except when multiple files contain similarly named
2014 functions.
2015
2016 @item break *@var{address}
2017 Set a breakpoint at address @var{address}. You can use this to set
2018 breakpoints in parts of your program which do not have debugging
2019 information or source files.
2020
2021 @item break
2022 When called without any arguments, @code{break} sets a breakpoint at
2023 the next instruction to be executed in the selected stack frame
2024 (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the Stack}). In any selected frame but the
2025 innermost, this will cause your program to stop as soon as control
2026 returns to that frame. This is similar to the effect of a
2027 @code{finish} command in the frame inside the selected frame---except
2028 that @code{finish} does not leave an active breakpoint. If you use
2029 @code{break} without an argument in the innermost frame, _GDBN__ will stop
2030 the next time it reaches the current location; this may be useful
2031 inside loops.
2032
2033 _GDBN__ normally ignores breakpoints when it resumes execution, until at
2034 least one instruction has been executed. If it did not do this, you
2035 would be unable to proceed past a breakpoint without first disabling the
2036 breakpoint. This rule applies whether or not the breakpoint already
2037 existed when your program stopped.
2038
2039 @item break @dots{} if @var{cond}
2040 Set a breakpoint with condition @var{cond}; evaluate the expression
2041 @var{cond} each time the breakpoint is reached, and stop only if the
2042 value is nonzero---that is, if @var{cond} evaluates as true.
2043 @samp{@dots{}} stands for one of the possible arguments described
2044 above (or no argument) specifying where to break. @xref{Conditions,
2045 ,Break Conditions}, for more information on breakpoint conditions.
2046
2047 @item tbreak @var{args}
2048 @kindex tbreak
2049 Set a breakpoint enabled only for one stop. @var{args} are the
2050 same as for the @code{break} command, and the breakpoint is set in the same
2051 way, but the breakpoint is automatically disabled after the first time your
2052 program stops there. @xref{Disabling, ,Disabling Breakpoints}.
2053
2054 @item rbreak @var{regex}
2055 @kindex rbreak
2056 @cindex regular expression
2057 @c FIXME what kind of regexp?
2058 Set breakpoints on all functions matching the regular expression
2059 @var{regex}. This command
2060 sets an unconditional breakpoint on all matches, printing a list of all
2061 breakpoints it set. Once these breakpoints are set, they are treated
2062 just like the breakpoints set with the @code{break} command. They can
2063 be deleted, disabled, made conditional, etc., in the standard ways.
2064
2065 When debugging C++ programs, @code{rbreak} is useful for setting
2066 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
2067 classes.
2068
2069 @kindex info breakpoints
2070 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info breakpoints}
2071 @item info breakpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2072 @itemx info break @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2073 @itemx info watchpoints @r{[}@var{n}@r{]}
2074 Print a table of all breakpoints and watchpoints set and not
2075 deleted, with the following columns for each breakpoint:
2076
2077 @table @emph
2078 @item Breakpoint Numbers
2079 @item Type
2080 Breakpoint or watchpoint.
2081 @item Disposition
2082 Whether the breakpoint is marked to be disabled or deleted when hit.
2083 @item Enabled or Disabled
2084 Enabled breakpoints are marked with @samp{y}. @samp{n} marks breakpoints
2085 that are not enabled.
2086 @item Address
2087 Where the breakpoint is in your program, as a memory address
2088 @item What
2089 Where the breakpoint is in the source for your program, as a file and
2090 line number.
2091 @end table
2092
2093 @noindent
2094 Breakpoint commands, if any, are listed after the line for the
2095 corresponding breakpoint.
2096
2097 @noindent
2098 @code{info break} with a breakpoint
2099 number @var{n} as argument lists only that breakpoint. The
2100 convenience variable @code{$_} and the default examining-address for
2101 the @code{x} command are set to the address of the last breakpoint
2102 listed (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining Memory}).
2103 @end table
2104
2105 _GDBN__ allows you to set any number of breakpoints at the same place in
2106 your program. There is nothing silly or meaningless about this. When
2107 the breakpoints are conditional, this is even useful
2108 (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break Conditions}).
2109
2110 @cindex negative breakpoint numbers
2111 @cindex internal _GDBN__ breakpoints
2112 _GDBN__ itself sometimes sets breakpoints in your program for special
2113 purposes, such as proper handling of @code{longjmp} (in C programs).
2114 These internal breakpoints are assigned negative numbers, starting with
2115 @code{-1}; @samp{info breakpoints} does not display them.
2116 @ignore
2117 @c FIXME! Moved to maint; doc when maint details avail.
2118 You can see these breakpoints with the _GDBN__ maintenance command
2119 @samp{maint info breakpoints}.
2120
2121 @table @code
2122 @kindex all-breakpoints
2123 @item info all-breakpoints
2124 Using the same format as @samp{info breakpoints}, display both the
2125 breakpoints you've set explicitly, and those _GDBN__ is using for
2126 internal purposes. Internal breakpoints are shown with negative
2127 breakpoint numbers. The type column identifies what kind of breakpoint
2128 is shown:
2129
2130 @table @code
2131 @item breakpoint
2132 Normal, explicitly set breakpoint.
2133
2134 @item watchpoint
2135 Normal, explicitly set watchpoint.
2136
2137 @item longjmp
2138 Internal breakpoint, used to handle correctly stepping through
2139 @code{longjmp} calls.
2140
2141 @item longjmp resume
2142 Internal breakpoint at the target of a @code{longjmp}.
2143
2144 @item until
2145 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the _GDBN__ @code{until} command.
2146
2147 @item finish
2148 Temporary internal breakpoint used by the _GDBN__ @code{finish} command.
2149 @end table
2150
2151 @end table
2152 @end ignore
2153
2154
2155 @node Set Watchpoints, Exception Handling, Set Breaks, Breakpoints
2156 @subsection Setting Watchpoints
2157 @cindex setting watchpoints
2158
2159 You can use a watchpoint to stop execution whenever the value of an
2160 expression changes, without having to predict a particular place
2161 where this may happen.
2162
2163 Watchpoints currently execute two orders of magnitude more slowly than
2164 other breakpoints, but this can well be worth it to catch errors where
2165 you have no clue what part of your program is the culprit. Some
2166 processors provide special hardware to support watchpoint evaluation; future
2167 releases of _GDBN__ will use such hardware if it is available.
2168
2169 @table @code
2170 @kindex watch
2171 @item watch @var{expr}
2172 Set a watchpoint for an expression.
2173
2174 @kindex info watchpoints
2175 @item info watchpoints
2176 This command prints a list of watchpoints and breakpoints; it is the
2177 same as @code{info break}.
2178 @end table
2179
2180 @node Exception Handling, Delete Breaks, Set Watchpoints, Breakpoints
2181 @subsection Breakpoints and Exceptions
2182 @cindex exception handlers
2183
2184 Some languages, such as GNU C++, implement exception handling. You can
2185 use _GDBN__ to examine what caused your program to raise an exception,
2186 and to list the exceptions your program is prepared to handle at a
2187 given point in time.
2188
2189 @table @code
2190 @item catch @var{exceptions}
2191 @kindex catch
2192 You can set breakpoints at active exception handlers by using the
2193 @code{catch} command. @var{exceptions} is a list of names of exceptions
2194 to catch.
2195 @end table
2196
2197 You can use @code{info catch} to list active exception handlers.
2198 @xref{Frame Info, ,Information About a Frame}.
2199
2200 There are currently some limitations to exception handling in _GDBN__.
2201 These will be corrected in a future release.
2202
2203 @itemize @bullet
2204 @item
2205 If you call a function interactively, _GDBN__ normally returns
2206 control to you when the function has finished executing. If the call
2207 raises an exception, however, the call may bypass the mechanism that
2208 returns control to you and cause your program to simply continue
2209 running until it hits a breakpoint, catches a signal that _GDBN__ is
2210 listening for, or exits.
2211 @item
2212 You cannot raise an exception interactively.
2213 @item
2214 You cannot interactively install an exception handler.
2215 @end itemize
2216
2217 @cindex raise exceptions
2218 Sometimes @code{catch} is not the best way to debug exception handling:
2219 if you need to know exactly where an exception is raised, it is better to
2220 stop @emph{before} the exception handler is called, since that way you
2221 can see the stack before any unwinding takes place. If you set a
2222 breakpoint in an exception handler instead, it may not be easy to find
2223 out where the exception was raised.
2224
2225 To stop just before an exception handler is called, you need some
2226 knowledge of the implementation. In the case of GNU C++, exceptions are
2227 raised by calling a library function named @code{__raise_exception}
2228 which has the following ANSI C interface:
2229
2230 @example
2231 /* @var{addr} is where the exception identifier is stored.
2232 ID is the exception identifier. */
2233 void __raise_exception (void **@var{addr}, void *@var{id});
2234 @end example
2235
2236 @noindent
2237 To make the debugger catch all exceptions before any stack
2238 unwinding takes place, set a breakpoint on @code{__raise_exception}
2239 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints Watchpoints and Exceptions}).
2240
2241 With a conditional breakpoint (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break Conditions})
2242 that depends on the value of @var{id}, you can stop your program when
2243 a specific exception is raised. You can use multiple conditional
2244 breakpoints to stop your program when any of a number of exceptions are
2245 raised.
2246
2247 @node Delete Breaks, Disabling, Exception Handling, Breakpoints
2248 @subsection Deleting Breakpoints
2249
2250 @cindex clearing breakpoints, watchpoints
2251 @cindex deleting breakpoints, watchpoints
2252 It is often necessary to eliminate a breakpoint or watchpoint once it
2253 has done its job and you no longer want your program to stop there. This
2254 is called @dfn{deleting} the breakpoint. A breakpoint that has been
2255 deleted no longer exists; it is forgotten.
2256
2257 With the @code{clear} command you can delete breakpoints according to
2258 where they are in your program. With the @code{delete} command you can
2259 delete individual breakpoints or watchpoints by specifying their
2260 breakpoint numbers.
2261
2262 It is not necessary to delete a breakpoint to proceed past it. _GDBN__
2263 automatically ignores breakpoints on the first instruction to be executed
2264 when you continue execution without changing the execution address.
2265
2266 @table @code
2267 @item clear
2268 @kindex clear
2269 Delete any breakpoints at the next instruction to be executed in the
2270 selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a Frame}). When
2271 the innermost frame is selected, this is a good way to delete a
2272 breakpoint where your program just stopped.
2273
2274 @item clear @var{function}
2275 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{function}
2276 Delete any breakpoints set at entry to the function @var{function}.
2277
2278 @item clear @var{linenum}
2279 @itemx clear @var{filename}:@var{linenum}
2280 Delete any breakpoints set at or within the code of the specified line.
2281
2282 @item delete @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2283 @cindex delete breakpoints
2284 @kindex delete
2285 @kindex d
2286 Delete the breakpoints or watchpoints of the numbers specified as
2287 arguments. If no argument is specified, delete all breakpoints (_GDBN__
2288 asks confirmation, unless you have @code{set confirm off}). You
2289 can abbreviate this command as @code{d}.
2290 @end table
2291
2292 @node Disabling, Conditions, Delete Breaks, Breakpoints
2293 @subsection Disabling Breakpoints
2294
2295 @cindex disabled breakpoints
2296 @cindex enabled breakpoints
2297 Rather than deleting a breakpoint or watchpoint, you might prefer to
2298 @dfn{disable} it. This makes the breakpoint inoperative as if it had
2299 been deleted, but remembers the information on the breakpoint so that
2300 you can @dfn{enable} it again later.
2301
2302 You disable and enable breakpoints and watchpoints with the
2303 @code{enable} and @code{disable} commands, optionally specifying one or
2304 more breakpoint numbers as arguments. Use @code{info break} or
2305 @code{info watch} to print a list of breakpoints or watchpoints if you
2306 do not know which numbers to use.
2307
2308 A breakpoint or watchpoint can have any of four different states of
2309 enablement:
2310
2311 @itemize @bullet
2312 @item
2313 Enabled. The breakpoint will stop your program. A breakpoint set
2314 with the @code{break} command starts out in this state.
2315 @item
2316 Disabled. The breakpoint has no effect on your program.
2317 @item
2318 Enabled once. The breakpoint will stop your program, but
2319 when it does so it will become disabled. A breakpoint set
2320 with the @code{tbreak} command starts out in this state.
2321 @item
2322 Enabled for deletion. The breakpoint will stop your program, but
2323 immediately after it does so it will be deleted permanently.
2324 @end itemize
2325
2326 You can use the following commands to enable or disable breakpoints and
2327 watchpoints:
2328
2329 @table @code
2330 @item disable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2331 @kindex disable breakpoints
2332 @kindex disable
2333 @kindex dis
2334 Disable the specified breakpoints---or all breakpoints, if none are
2335 listed. A disabled breakpoint has no effect but is not forgotten. All
2336 options such as ignore-counts, conditions and commands are remembered in
2337 case the breakpoint is enabled again later. You may abbreviate
2338 @code{disable} as @code{dis}.
2339
2340 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} @r{[}@var{bnums}@dots{}@r{]}
2341 @kindex enable breakpoints
2342 @kindex enable
2343 Enable the specified breakpoints (or all defined breakpoints). They
2344 become effective once again in stopping your program.
2345
2346 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} once @var{bnums}@dots{}
2347 Enable the specified breakpoints temporarily. Each will be disabled
2348 again the next time it stops your program.
2349
2350 @item enable @r{[}breakpoints@r{]} delete @var{bnums}@dots{}
2351 Enable the specified breakpoints to work once and then die. Each of
2352 the breakpoints will be deleted the next time it stops your program.
2353 @end table
2354
2355 Save for a breakpoint set with @code{tbreak} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
2356 ,Setting Breakpoints}), breakpoints that you set are initially
2357 enabled; subsequently, they become disabled or enabled only when you
2358 use one of the commands above. (The command @code{until} can set and
2359 delete a breakpoint of its own, but it will not change the state of
2360 your other breakpoints; see @ref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and Stepping}.)
2361
2362 @node Conditions, Break Commands, Disabling, Breakpoints
2363 @subsection Break Conditions
2364 @cindex conditional breakpoints
2365 @cindex breakpoint conditions
2366
2367 @c FIXME what is scope of break condition expr? Context where wanted?
2368 @c in particular for a watchpoint?
2369 The simplest sort of breakpoint breaks every time your program reaches a
2370 specified place. You can also specify a @dfn{condition} for a
2371 breakpoint. A condition is just a Boolean expression in your
2372 programming language (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). A breakpoint with
2373 a condition evaluates the expression each time your program reaches it,
2374 and your program stops only if the condition is @emph{true}.
2375
2376 This is the converse of using assertions for program validation; in that
2377 situation, you want to stop when the assertion is violated---that is,
2378 when the condition is false. In C, if you want to test an assertion expressed
2379 by the condition @var{assert}, you should set the condition
2380 @samp{! @var{assert}} on the appropriate breakpoint.
2381
2382 Conditions are also accepted for watchpoints; you may not need them,
2383 since a watchpoint is inspecting the value of an expression anyhow---but
2384 it might be simpler, say, to just set a watchpoint on a variable name,
2385 and specify a condition that tests whether the new value is an interesting
2386 one.
2387
2388 Break conditions can have side effects, and may even call functions in
2389 your program. This can be useful, for example, to activate functions
2390 that log program progress, or to use your own print functions to
2391 format special data structures. The effects are completely predictable
2392 unless there is another enabled breakpoint at the same address. (In
2393 that case, _GDBN__ might see the other breakpoint first and stop your
2394 program without checking the condition of this one.) Note that
2395 breakpoint commands are usually more convenient and flexible for the
2396 purpose of performing side effects when a breakpoint is reached
2397 (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint Command Lists}).
2398
2399 Break conditions can be specified when a breakpoint is set, by using
2400 @samp{if} in the arguments to the @code{break} command. @xref{Set
2401 Breaks, ,Setting Breakpoints}. They can also be changed at any time
2402 with the @code{condition} command. The @code{watch} command does not
2403 recognize the @code{if} keyword; @code{condition} is the only way to
2404 impose a further condition on a watchpoint.
2405
2406 @table @code
2407 @item condition @var{bnum} @var{expression}
2408 @kindex condition
2409 Specify @var{expression} as the break condition for breakpoint or
2410 watchpoint number @var{bnum}. From now on, this breakpoint will stop
2411 your program only if the value of @var{expression} is true (nonzero, in
2412 C). When you use @code{condition}, _GDBN__ checks @var{expression}
2413 immediately for syntactic correctness, and to determine whether symbols
2414 in it have referents in the context of your breakpoint.
2415 @c FIXME so what does GDB do if there is no referent? Moreover, what
2416 @c about watchpoints?
2417 _GDBN__ does
2418 not actually evaluate @var{expression} at the time the @code{condition}
2419 command is given, however. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
2420
2421 @item condition @var{bnum}
2422 Remove the condition from breakpoint number @var{bnum}. It becomes
2423 an ordinary unconditional breakpoint.
2424 @end table
2425
2426 @cindex ignore count (of breakpoint)
2427 A special case of a breakpoint condition is to stop only when the
2428 breakpoint has been reached a certain number of times. This is so
2429 useful that there is a special way to do it, using the @dfn{ignore
2430 count} of the breakpoint. Every breakpoint has an ignore count, which
2431 is an integer. Most of the time, the ignore count is zero, and
2432 therefore has no effect. But if your program reaches a breakpoint whose
2433 ignore count is positive, then instead of stopping, it just decrements
2434 the ignore count by one and continues. As a result, if the ignore count
2435 value is @var{n}, the breakpoint will not stop the next @var{n} times it
2436 is reached.
2437
2438 @table @code
2439 @item ignore @var{bnum} @var{count}
2440 @kindex ignore
2441 Set the ignore count of breakpoint number @var{bnum} to @var{count}.
2442 The next @var{count} times the breakpoint is reached, your program's
2443 execution will not stop; other than to decrement the ignore count, _GDBN__
2444 takes no action.
2445
2446 To make the breakpoint stop the next time it is reached, specify
2447 a count of zero.
2448
2449 @item continue @var{count}
2450 @itemx c @var{count}
2451 @itemx fg @var{count}
2452 @kindex continue @var{count}
2453 Continue execution of your program, setting the ignore count of the
2454 breakpoint where your program stopped to @var{count} minus one.
2455 Thus, your program will not stop at this breakpoint until the
2456 @var{count}'th time it is reached.
2457
2458 An argument to this command is meaningful only when your program stopped
2459 due to a breakpoint. At other times, the argument to @code{continue} is
2460 ignored.
2461
2462 The synonym @code{fg} is provided purely for convenience, and has
2463 exactly the same behavior as other forms of the command.
2464 @end table
2465
2466 If a breakpoint has a positive ignore count and a condition, the condition
2467 is not checked. Once the ignore count reaches zero, the condition will
2468 be checked.
2469
2470 You could achieve the effect of the ignore count with a condition such
2471 as _0__@w{@samp{$foo-- <= 0}}_1__ using a debugger convenience variable that
2472 is decremented each time. @xref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
2473 Variables}.
2474
2475 @node Break Commands, Breakpoint Menus, Conditions, Breakpoints
2476 @subsection Breakpoint Command Lists
2477
2478 @cindex breakpoint commands
2479 You can give any breakpoint (or watchpoint) a series of commands to
2480 execute when your program stops due to that breakpoint. For example, you
2481 might want to print the values of certain expressions, or enable other
2482 breakpoints.
2483
2484 @table @code
2485 @item commands @r{[}@var{bnum}@r{]}
2486 @itemx @dots{} @var{command-list} @dots{}
2487 @itemx end
2488 @kindex commands
2489 @kindex end
2490 Specify a list of commands for breakpoint number @var{bnum}. The commands
2491 themselves appear on the following lines. Type a line containing just
2492 @code{end} to terminate the commands.
2493
2494 To remove all commands from a breakpoint, type @code{commands} and
2495 follow it immediately with @code{end}; that is, give no commands.
2496
2497 With no @var{bnum} argument, @code{commands} refers to the last
2498 breakpoint or watchpoint set (not to the breakpoint most recently
2499 encountered).
2500 @end table
2501
2502 Pressing @key{RET} as a means of repeating the last _GDBN__ command is
2503 disabled within a @var{command-list}.
2504
2505 You can use breakpoint commands to start your program up again. Simply
2506 use the @code{continue} command, or @code{step}, or any other command
2507 that resumes execution. Subsequent commands in the command list are
2508 ignored.
2509
2510 @kindex silent
2511 If the first command specified is @code{silent}, the usual message about
2512 stopping at a breakpoint is not printed. This may be desirable for
2513 breakpoints that are to print a specific message and then continue.
2514 If the remaining commands too print nothing, you will see no sign that
2515 the breakpoint was reached at all. @code{silent} is meaningful only
2516 at the beginning of a breakpoint command list.
2517
2518 The commands @code{echo} and @code{output} that allow you to print
2519 precisely controlled output are often useful in silent breakpoints.
2520 @xref{Output, ,Commands for Controlled Output}.
2521
2522 For example, here is how you could use breakpoint commands to print the
2523 value of @code{x} at entry to @code{foo} whenever @code{x} is positive.
2524
2525 _0__@example
2526 break foo if x>0
2527 commands
2528 silent
2529 echo x is\040
2530 output x
2531 echo \n
2532 cont
2533 end
2534 _1__@end example
2535
2536 One application for breakpoint commands is to compensate for one bug so
2537 you can test for another. Put a breakpoint just after the erroneous line
2538 of code, give it a condition to detect the case in which something
2539 erroneous has been done, and give it commands to assign correct values
2540 to any variables that need them. End with the @code{continue} command
2541 so that your program does not stop, and start with the @code{silent}
2542 command so that no output is produced. Here is an example:
2543
2544 @example
2545 break 403
2546 commands
2547 silent
2548 set x = y + 4
2549 cont
2550 end
2551 @end example
2552
2553 @cindex lost output
2554 One deficiency in the operation of automatically continuing breakpoints
2555 under Unix appears when your program uses raw mode for the terminal.
2556 _GDBN__ switches back to its own terminal modes (not raw) before executing
2557 commands, and then must switch back to raw mode when your program is
2558 continued. This causes any pending terminal input to be lost.
2559 @c FIXME: revisit below when GNU sys avail.
2560 @c In the GNU system, this will be fixed by changing the behavior of
2561 @c terminal modes.
2562
2563 Under Unix, you can get around this problem by writing actions into
2564 the breakpoint condition rather than in commands. For example
2565
2566 @example
2567 condition 5 (x = y + 4), 0
2568 @end example
2569
2570 @noindent
2571 specifies a condition expression (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}) that will
2572 change @code{x} as needed, then always have the value zero so your
2573 program will not stop. No input is lost here, because _GDBN__ evaluates
2574 break conditions without changing the terminal modes. When you want
2575 to have nontrivial conditions for performing the side effects, the
2576 operators @samp{&&}, @samp{||} and @samp{?@dots{}:} may be useful.
2577
2578 @node Breakpoint Menus, Error in Breakpoints, Break Commands, Breakpoints
2579 @subsection Breakpoint Menus
2580 @cindex overloading
2581 @cindex symbol overloading
2582
2583 Some programming languages (notably C++) permit a single function name
2584 to be defined several times, for application in different contexts.
2585 This is called @dfn{overloading}. When a function name is overloaded,
2586 @samp{break @var{function}} is not enough to tell _GDBN__ where you want
2587 a breakpoint. If you realize this will be a problem, you can use
2588 something like @samp{break @var{function}(@var{types})} to specify which
2589 particular version of the function you want. Otherwise, _GDBN__ offers
2590 you a menu of numbered choices for different possible breakpoints, and
2591 waits for your selection with the prompt @samp{>}. The first two
2592 options are always @samp{[0] cancel} and @samp{[1] all}. Typing @kbd{1}
2593 sets a breakpoint at each definition of @var{function}, and typing
2594 @kbd{0} aborts the @code{break} command without setting any new
2595 breakpoints.
2596
2597 For example, the following session excerpt shows an attempt to set a
2598 breakpoint at the overloaded symbol @code{String::after}.
2599 We choose three particular definitions of that function name:
2600
2601 @c FIXME! This is likely to change to show arg type lists, at least
2602 @example
2603 (_GDBP__) b String::after
2604 [0] cancel
2605 [1] all
2606 [2] file:String.cc; line number:867
2607 [3] file:String.cc; line number:860
2608 [4] file:String.cc; line number:875
2609 [5] file:String.cc; line number:853
2610 [6] file:String.cc; line number:846
2611 [7] file:String.cc; line number:735
2612 > 2 4 6
2613 Breakpoint 1 at 0xb26c: file String.cc, line 867.
2614 Breakpoint 2 at 0xb344: file String.cc, line 875.
2615 Breakpoint 3 at 0xafcc: file String.cc, line 846.
2616 Multiple breakpoints were set.
2617 Use the "delete" command to delete unwanted breakpoints.
2618 (_GDBP__)
2619 @end example
2620
2621 @node Error in Breakpoints, , Breakpoint Menus, Breakpoints
2622 @subsection ``Cannot Insert Breakpoints''
2623
2624 @c FIXME: "cannot insert breakpoints" error, v unclear.
2625 @c Q in pending mail to Gilmore. ---pesch@cygnus.com, 26mar91
2626 @c some light may be shed by looking at instances of
2627 @c ONE_PROCESS_WRITETEXT. But error message seems possible otherwise
2628 @c too. pesch, 20sep91
2629 Under some operating systems, breakpoints cannot be used in a program if
2630 any other process is running that program. In this situation,
2631 attempting to run or continue a program with a breakpoint causes _GDBN__
2632 to stop the other process.
2633
2634 When this happens, you have three ways to proceed:
2635
2636 @enumerate
2637 @item
2638 Remove or disable the breakpoints, then continue.
2639
2640 @item
2641 Suspend _GDBN__, and copy the file containing your program to a new name.
2642 Resume _GDBN__ and use the @code{exec-file} command to specify that _GDBN__
2643 should run your program under that name. Then start your program again.
2644
2645 @c FIXME: RMS commented here "Show example". Maybe when someone
2646 @c explains the first FIXME: in this section...
2647
2648 @item
2649 Relink your program so that the text segment is nonsharable, using the
2650 linker option @samp{-N}. The operating system limitation may not apply
2651 to nonsharable executables.
2652 @end enumerate
2653
2654 @node Continuing and Stepping, Signals, Breakpoints, Stopping
2655 @section Continuing and Stepping
2656
2657 @cindex stepping
2658 @cindex continuing
2659 @cindex resuming execution
2660 @dfn{Continuing} means resuming program execution until your program
2661 completes normally. In contrast, @dfn{stepping} means executing just
2662 one more ``step'' of your program, where ``step'' may mean either one
2663 line of source code, or one machine instruction (depending on what
2664 particular command you use). Either when continuing
2665 or when stepping, your program may stop even sooner, due to a breakpoint
2666 or to a signal. (If due to a signal, you may want to use @code{handle},
2667 or use @samp{signal 0} to resume execution. @xref{Signals, ,Signals}.)
2668
2669 @table @code
2670 @item continue @r{[}@var{ignore-count}@r{]}
2671 @kindex continue
2672 Resume program execution, at the address where your program last stopped;
2673 any breakpoints set at that address are bypassed. The optional argument
2674 @var{ignore-count} allows you to specify a further number of times to
2675 ignore a breakpoint at this location; its effect is like that of
2676 @code{ignore} (@pxref{Conditions, ,Break Conditions}).
2677
2678 To resume execution at a different place, you can use @code{return}
2679 (@pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a Function}) to go back to the
2680 calling function; or @code{jump} (@pxref{Jumping, ,Continuing at a
2681 Different Address}) to go to an arbitrary location in your program.
2682 @end table
2683
2684 A typical technique for using stepping is to set a breakpoint
2685 (@pxref{Breakpoints, ,Breakpoints Watchpoints and Exceptions}) at the
2686 beginning of the function or the section of your program where a
2687 problem is believed to lie, run your program until it stops at that
2688 breakpoint, and then step through the suspect area, examining the
2689 variables that are interesting, until you see the problem happen.
2690
2691 @table @code
2692 @item step
2693 @kindex step
2694 @kindex s
2695 Continue running your program until control reaches a different source
2696 line, then stop it and return control to _GDBN__. This command is
2697 abbreviated @code{s}.
2698
2699 @quotation
2700 @emph{Warning:} If you use the @code{step} command while control is
2701 within a function that was compiled without debugging information,
2702 execution will proceed until control reaches another function.
2703 @end quotation
2704
2705 @item step @var{count}
2706 Continue running as in @code{step}, but do so @var{count} times. If a
2707 breakpoint is reached or a signal not related to stepping occurs before
2708 @var{count} steps, stepping stops right away.
2709
2710 @item next @r{[}@var{count}@r{]}
2711 @kindex next
2712 @kindex n
2713 Continue to the next source line in the current (innermost) stack frame.
2714 Similar to @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the line
2715 of code are executed without stopping. Execution stops when control
2716 reaches a different line of code at the stack level which was executing
2717 when the @code{next} command was given. This command is abbreviated
2718 @code{n}.
2719
2720 An argument @var{count} is a repeat count, as for @code{step}.
2721
2722 @code{next} within a function that lacks debugging information acts like
2723 @code{step}, but any function calls appearing within the code of the
2724 function are executed without stopping.
2725
2726 @item finish
2727 @kindex finish
2728 Continue running until just after function in the selected stack frame
2729 returns. Print the returned value (if any).
2730
2731 Contrast this with the @code{return} command (@pxref{Returning,
2732 ,Returning from a Function}).
2733
2734 @item until
2735 @kindex until
2736 @item u
2737 @kindex u
2738 Continue running until a source line past the current line, in the
2739 current stack frame, is reached. This command is used to avoid single
2740 stepping through a loop more than once. It is like the @code{next}
2741 command, except that when @code{until} encounters a jump, it
2742 automatically continues execution until the program counter is greater
2743 than the address of the jump.
2744
2745 This means that when you reach the end of a loop after single stepping
2746 though it, @code{until} will cause your program to continue execution
2747 until the loop is exited. In contrast, a @code{next} command at the end
2748 of a loop will simply step back to the beginning of the loop, which
2749 would force you to step through the next iteration.
2750
2751 @code{until} always stops your program if it attempts to exit the current
2752 stack frame.
2753
2754 @code{until} may produce somewhat counterintuitive results if the order
2755 of machine code does not match the order of the source lines. For
2756 example, in the following excerpt from a debugging session, the @code{f}
2757 (@code{frame}) command shows that execution is stopped at line
2758 @code{206}; yet when we use @code{until}, we get to line @code{195}:
2759
2760 @example
2761 (_GDBP__) f
2762 #0 main (argc=4, argv=0xf7fffae8) at m4.c:206
2763 206 expand_input();
2764 (_GDBP__) until
2765 195 for ( ; argc > 0; NEXTARG) @{
2766 @end example
2767
2768 This happened because, for execution efficiency, the compiler had
2769 generated code for the loop closure test at the end, rather than the
2770 start, of the loop---even though the test in a C @code{for}-loop is
2771 written before the body of the loop. The @code{until} command appeared
2772 to step back to the beginning of the loop when it advanced to this
2773 expression; however, it has not really gone to an earlier
2774 statement---not in terms of the actual machine code.
2775
2776 @code{until} with no argument works by means of single
2777 instruction stepping, and hence is slower than @code{until} with an
2778 argument.
2779
2780 @item until @var{location}
2781 @item u @var{location}
2782 Continue running your program until either the specified location is
2783 reached, or the current stack frame returns. @var{location} is any of
2784 the forms of argument acceptable to @code{break} (@pxref{Set Breaks,
2785 ,Setting Breakpoints}). This form of the command uses breakpoints,
2786 and hence is quicker than @code{until} without an argument.
2787
2788 @item stepi
2789 @itemx si
2790 @kindex stepi
2791 @kindex si
2792 Execute one machine instruction, then stop and return to the debugger.
2793
2794 It is often useful to do @samp{display/i $pc} when stepping by machine
2795 instructions. This will cause the next instruction to be executed to
2796 be displayed automatically at each stop. @xref{Auto Display,
2797 ,Automatic Display}.
2798
2799 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{step}.
2800
2801 @item nexti
2802 @itemx ni
2803 @kindex nexti
2804 @kindex ni
2805 Execute one machine instruction, but if it is a function call,
2806 proceed until the function returns.
2807
2808 An argument is a repeat count, as in @code{next}.
2809 @end table
2810
2811 @node Signals, , Continuing and Stepping, Stopping
2812 @section Signals
2813 @cindex signals
2814
2815 A signal is an asynchronous event that can happen in a program. The
2816 operating system defines the possible kinds of signals, and gives each
2817 kind a name and a number. For example, in Unix @code{SIGINT} is the
2818 signal a program gets when you type an interrupt (often @kbd{C-c});
2819 @code{SIGSEGV} is the signal a program gets from referencing a place in
2820 memory far away from all the areas in use; @code{SIGALRM} occurs when
2821 the alarm clock timer goes off (which happens only if your program has
2822 requested an alarm).
2823
2824 @cindex fatal signals
2825 Some signals, including @code{SIGALRM}, are a normal part of the
2826 functioning of your program. Others, such as @code{SIGSEGV}, indicate
2827 errors; these signals are @dfn{fatal} (kill your program immediately) if the
2828 program has not specified in advance some other way to handle the signal.
2829 @code{SIGINT} does not indicate an error in your program, but it is normally
2830 fatal so it can carry out the purpose of the interrupt: to kill the program.
2831
2832 _GDBN__ has the ability to detect any occurrence of a signal in your
2833 program. You can tell _GDBN__ in advance what to do for each kind of
2834 signal.
2835
2836 @cindex handling signals
2837 Normally, _GDBN__ is set up to ignore non-erroneous signals like @code{SIGALRM}
2838 (so as not to interfere with their role in the functioning of your program)
2839 but to stop your program immediately whenever an error signal happens.
2840 You can change these settings with the @code{handle} command.
2841
2842 @table @code
2843 @item info signals
2844 @kindex info signals
2845 Print a table of all the kinds of signals and how _GDBN__ has been told to
2846 handle each one. You can use this to see the signal numbers of all
2847 the defined types of signals.
2848
2849 @item handle @var{signal} @var{keywords}@dots{}
2850 @kindex handle
2851 Change the way _GDBN__ handles signal @var{signal}. @var{signal} can be the
2852 number of a signal or its name (with or without the @samp{SIG} at the
2853 beginning). The @var{keywords} say what change to make.
2854 @end table
2855
2856 @c @group
2857 The keywords allowed by the @code{handle} command can be abbreviated.
2858 Their full names are:
2859
2860 @table @code
2861 @item nostop
2862 _GDBN__ should not stop your program when this signal happens. It may
2863 still print a message telling you that the signal has come in.
2864
2865 @item stop
2866 _GDBN__ should stop your program when this signal happens. This implies
2867 the @code{print} keyword as well.
2868
2869 @item print
2870 _GDBN__ should print a message when this signal happens.
2871
2872 @item noprint
2873 _GDBN__ should not mention the occurrence of the signal at all. This
2874 implies the @code{nostop} keyword as well.
2875
2876 @item pass
2877 _GDBN__ should allow your program to see this signal; your program will be
2878 able to handle the signal, or may be terminated if the signal is fatal
2879 and not handled.
2880
2881 @item nopass
2882 _GDBN__ should not allow your program to see this signal.
2883 @end table
2884 @c @end group
2885
2886 When a signal has been set to stop your program, your program cannot see the
2887 signal until you continue. It will see the signal then, if @code{pass} is
2888 in effect for the signal in question @emph{at that time}. In other words,
2889 after _GDBN__ reports a signal, you can use the @code{handle} command with
2890 @code{pass} or @code{nopass} to control whether that signal will be seen by
2891 your program when you later continue it.
2892
2893 You can also use the @code{signal} command to prevent your program from
2894 seeing a signal, or cause it to see a signal it normally would not see,
2895 or to give it any signal at any time. For example, if your program stopped
2896 due to some sort of memory reference error, you might store correct
2897 values into the erroneous variables and continue, hoping to see more
2898 execution; but your program would probably terminate immediately as
2899 a result of the fatal signal once it saw the signal. To prevent this,
2900 you can continue with @samp{signal 0}. @xref{Signaling, ,Giving your
2901 Program a Signal}.
2902
2903 @node Stack, Source, Stopping, Top
2904 @chapter Examining the Stack
2905
2906 When your program has stopped, the first thing you need to know is where it
2907 stopped and how it got there.
2908
2909 @cindex call stack
2910 Each time your program performs a function call, the information about
2911 where in your program the call was made from is saved in a block of data
2912 called a @dfn{stack frame}. The frame also contains the arguments of the
2913 call and the local variables of the function that was called. All the
2914 stack frames are allocated in a region of memory called the @dfn{call
2915 stack}.
2916
2917 When your program stops, the _GDBN__ commands for examining the stack allow you
2918 to see all of this information.
2919
2920 @cindex selected frame
2921 One of the stack frames is @dfn{selected} by _GDBN__ and many _GDBN__ commands
2922 refer implicitly to the selected frame. In particular, whenever you ask
2923 _GDBN__ for the value of a variable in your program, the value is found in the
2924 selected frame. There are special _GDBN__ commands to select whichever frame
2925 you are interested in.
2926
2927 When your program stops, _GDBN__ automatically selects the currently executing
2928 frame and describes it briefly as the @code{frame} command does
2929 (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information About a Frame}).
2930
2931 @menu
2932 * Frames:: Stack Frames
2933 * Backtrace:: Backtraces
2934 * Selection:: Selecting a Frame
2935 * Frame Info:: Information on a Frame
2936 @end menu
2937
2938 @node Frames, Backtrace, Stack, Stack
2939 @section Stack Frames
2940
2941 @cindex frame
2942 @cindex stack frame
2943 The call stack is divided up into contiguous pieces called @dfn{stack
2944 frames}, or @dfn{frames} for short; each frame is the data associated
2945 with one call to one function. The frame contains the arguments given
2946 to the function, the function's local variables, and the address at
2947 which the function is executing.
2948
2949 @cindex initial frame
2950 @cindex outermost frame
2951 @cindex innermost frame
2952 When your program is started, the stack has only one frame, that of the
2953 function @code{main}. This is called the @dfn{initial} frame or the
2954 @dfn{outermost} frame. Each time a function is called, a new frame is
2955 made. Each time a function returns, the frame for that function invocation
2956 is eliminated. If a function is recursive, there can be many frames for
2957 the same function. The frame for the function in which execution is
2958 actually occurring is called the @dfn{innermost} frame. This is the most
2959 recently created of all the stack frames that still exist.
2960
2961 @cindex frame pointer
2962 Inside your program, stack frames are identified by their addresses. A
2963 stack frame consists of many bytes, each of which has its own address; each
2964 kind of computer has a convention for choosing one of those bytes whose
2965 address serves as the address of the frame. Usually this address is kept
2966 in a register called the @dfn{frame pointer register} while execution is
2967 going on in that frame.
2968
2969 @cindex frame number
2970 _GDBN__ assigns numbers to all existing stack frames, starting with
2971 zero for the innermost frame, one for the frame that called it,
2972 and so on upward. These numbers do not really exist in your program;
2973 they are assigned by _GDBN__ to give you a way of designating stack
2974 frames in _GDBN__ commands.
2975
2976 @cindex frameless execution
2977 Some compilers allow functions to be compiled so that they operate
2978 without stack frames. (For example, the @code{_GCC__} option
2979 @samp{-fomit-frame-pointer} will generate functions without a frame.)
2980 This is occasionally done with heavily used library functions to save
2981 the frame setup time. _GDBN__ has limited facilities for dealing with
2982 these function invocations. If the innermost function invocation has no
2983 stack frame, _GDBN__ will nevertheless regard it as though it had a
2984 separate frame, which is numbered zero as usual, allowing correct
2985 tracing of the function call chain. However, _GDBN__ has no provision
2986 for frameless functions elsewhere in the stack.
2987
2988 @node Backtrace, Selection, Frames, Stack
2989 @section Backtraces
2990
2991 A backtrace is a summary of how your program got where it is. It shows one
2992 line per frame, for many frames, starting with the currently executing
2993 frame (frame zero), followed by its caller (frame one), and on up the
2994 stack.
2995
2996 @table @code
2997 @item backtrace
2998 @itemx bt
2999 @kindex backtrace
3000 @kindex bt
3001 Print a backtrace of the entire stack: one line per frame for all
3002 frames in the stack.
3003
3004 You can stop the backtrace at any time by typing the system interrupt
3005 character, normally @kbd{C-c}.
3006
3007 @item backtrace @var{n}
3008 @itemx bt @var{n}
3009 Similar, but print only the innermost @var{n} frames.
3010
3011 @item backtrace -@var{n}
3012 @itemx bt -@var{n}
3013 Similar, but print only the outermost @var{n} frames.
3014 @end table
3015
3016 @kindex where
3017 @kindex info stack
3018 @kindex info s
3019 The names @code{where} and @code{info stack} (abbreviated @code{info s})
3020 are additional aliases for @code{backtrace}.
3021
3022 Each line in the backtrace shows the frame number and the function name.
3023 The program counter value is also shown---unless you use @code{set
3024 print address off}. The backtrace also shows the source file name and
3025 line number, as well as the arguments to the function. The program
3026 counter value is omitted if it is at the beginning of the code for that
3027 line number.
3028
3029 Here is an example of a backtrace. It was made with the command
3030 @samp{bt 3}, so it shows the innermost three frames.
3031
3032 @smallexample
3033 @group
3034 #0 m4_traceon (obs=0x24eb0, argc=1, argv=0x2b8c8)
3035 at builtin.c:993
3036 #1 0x6e38 in expand_macro (sym=0x2b600) at macro.c:242
3037 #2 0x6840 in expand_token (obs=0x0, t=177664, td=0xf7fffb08)
3038 at macro.c:71
3039 (More stack frames follow...)
3040 @end group
3041 @end smallexample
3042
3043 @noindent
3044 The display for frame zero does not begin with a program counter
3045 value, indicating that your program has stopped at the beginning of the
3046 code for line @code{993} of @code{builtin.c}.
3047
3048 @node Selection, Frame Info, Backtrace, Stack
3049 @section Selecting a Frame
3050
3051 Most commands for examining the stack and other data in your program work on
3052 whichever stack frame is selected at the moment. Here are the commands for
3053 selecting a stack frame; all of them finish by printing a brief description
3054 of the stack frame just selected.
3055
3056 @table @code
3057 @item frame @var{n}
3058 @itemx f @var{n}
3059 @kindex frame
3060 @kindex f
3061 Select frame number @var{n}. Recall that frame zero is the innermost
3062 (currently executing) frame, frame one is the frame that called the
3063 innermost one, and so on. The highest-numbered frame is @code{main}'s
3064 frame.
3065
3066 @item frame @var{addr}
3067 @itemx f @var{addr}
3068 Select the frame at address @var{addr}. This is useful mainly if the
3069 chaining of stack frames has been damaged by a bug, making it
3070 impossible for _GDBN__ to assign numbers properly to all frames. In
3071 addition, this can be useful when your program has multiple stacks and
3072 switches between them.
3073
3074 _if__(_SPARC__)
3075 On the SPARC architecture, @code{frame} needs two addresses to
3076 select an arbitrary frame: a frame pointer and a stack pointer.
3077 @c note to future updaters: this is conditioned on a flag
3078 @c FRAME_SPECIFICATION_DYADIC in the tm-*.h files, currently only used
3079 @c by SPARC, hence the specific attribution. Generalize or list all
3080 @c possibilities if more supported machines start doing this.
3081 _fi__(_SPARC__)
3082
3083 @item up @var{n}
3084 @kindex up
3085 Move @var{n} frames up the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3086 advances toward the outermost frame, to higher frame numbers, to frames
3087 that have existed longer. @var{n} defaults to one.
3088
3089 @item down @var{n}
3090 @kindex down
3091 @kindex do
3092 Move @var{n} frames down the stack. For positive numbers @var{n}, this
3093 advances toward the innermost frame, to lower frame numbers, to frames
3094 that were created more recently. @var{n} defaults to one. You may
3095 abbreviate @code{down} as @code{do}.
3096 @end table
3097
3098 All of these commands end by printing two lines of output describing the
3099 frame. The first line shows the frame number, the function name, the
3100 arguments, and the source file and line number of execution in that
3101 frame. The second line shows the text of that source line. For
3102 example:
3103
3104 @smallexample
3105 @group
3106 (_GDBP__) up
3107 #1 0x22f0 in main (argc=1, argv=0xf7fffbf4, env=0xf7fffbfc)
3108 at env.c:10
3109 10 read_input_file (argv[i]);
3110 @end group
3111 @end smallexample
3112
3113 After such a printout, the @code{list} command with no arguments will
3114 print ten lines centered on the point of execution in the frame.
3115 @xref{List, ,Printing Source Lines}.
3116
3117 @table @code
3118 @item up-silently @var{n}
3119 @itemx down-silently @var{n}
3120 @kindex down-silently
3121 @kindex up-silently
3122 These two commands are variants of @code{up} and @code{down},
3123 respectively; they differ in that they do their work silently, without
3124 causing display of the new frame. They are intended primarily for use
3125 in _GDBN__ command scripts, where the output might be unnecessary and
3126 distracting.
3127 @end table
3128
3129 @node Frame Info, , Selection, Stack
3130 @section Information About a Frame
3131
3132 There are several other commands to print information about the selected
3133 stack frame.
3134
3135 @table @code
3136 @item frame
3137 @itemx f
3138 When used without any argument, this command does not change which
3139 frame is selected, but prints a brief description of the currently
3140 selected stack frame. It can be abbreviated @code{f}. With an
3141 argument, this command is used to select a stack frame
3142 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a Frame}).
3143
3144 @item info frame
3145 @itemx info f
3146 @kindex info frame
3147 @kindex info f
3148 This command prints a verbose description of the selected stack frame,
3149 including the address of the frame, the addresses of the next frame down
3150 (called by this frame) and the next frame up (caller of this frame), the
3151 language that the source code corresponding to this frame was written in,
3152 the address of the frame's arguments, the program counter saved in it
3153 (the address of execution in the caller frame), and which registers
3154 were saved in the frame. The verbose description is useful when
3155 something has gone wrong that has made the stack format fail to fit
3156 the usual conventions.
3157
3158 @item info frame @var{addr}
3159 @itemx info f @var{addr}
3160 Print a verbose description of the frame at address @var{addr},
3161 without selecting that frame. The selected frame remains unchanged by
3162 this command.
3163
3164 @item info args
3165 @kindex info args
3166 Print the arguments of the selected frame, each on a separate line.
3167
3168 @item info locals
3169 @kindex info locals
3170 Print the local variables of the selected frame, each on a separate
3171 line. These are all variables declared static or automatic within all
3172 program blocks that execution in this frame is currently inside of.
3173
3174 @item info catch
3175 @kindex info catch
3176 @cindex catch exceptions
3177 @cindex exception handlers
3178 Print a list of all the exception handlers that are active in the
3179 current stack frame at the current point of execution. To see other
3180 exception handlers, visit the associated frame (using the @code{up},
3181 @code{down}, or @code{frame} commands); then type @code{info catch}.
3182 @xref{Exception Handling, ,Breakpoints and Exceptions}.
3183 @end table
3184
3185 @node Source, Data, Stack, Top
3186 @chapter Examining Source Files
3187
3188 _GDBN__ can print parts of your program's source, since the debugging
3189 information recorded in your program tells _GDBN__ what source files were
3190 used to build it. When your program stops, _GDBN__ spontaneously prints
3191 the line where it stopped. Likewise, when you select a stack frame
3192 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a Frame}), _GDBN__ prints the line where
3193 execution in that frame has stopped. You can print other portions of
3194 source files by explicit command.
3195
3196 If you use _GDBN__ through its GNU Emacs interface, you may prefer to use
3197 Emacs facilities to view source; @pxref{Emacs, ,Using _GDBN__ under GNU
3198 Emacs}.
3199
3200 @menu
3201 * List:: Printing Source Lines
3202 * Search:: Searching Source Files
3203 * Source Path:: Specifying Source Directories
3204 * Machine Code:: Source and Machine Code
3205 @end menu
3206
3207 @node List, Search, Source, Source
3208 @section Printing Source Lines
3209
3210 @kindex list
3211 @kindex l
3212 To print lines from a source file, use the @code{list} command
3213 (abbreviated @code{l}). There are several ways to specify what part
3214 of the file you want to print.
3215
3216 Here are the forms of the @code{list} command most commonly used:
3217
3218 @table @code
3219 @item list @var{linenum}
3220 Print lines centered around line number @var{linenum} in the
3221 current source file.
3222
3223 @item list @var{function}
3224 Print lines centered around the beginning of function
3225 @var{function}.
3226
3227 @item list
3228 Print more lines. If the last lines printed were printed with a
3229 @code{list} command, this prints lines following the last lines
3230 printed; however, if the last line printed was a solitary line printed
3231 as part of displaying a stack frame (@pxref{Stack, ,Examining the
3232 Stack}), this prints lines centered around that line.
3233
3234 @item list -
3235 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
3236 @end table
3237
3238 By default, _GDBN__ prints ten source lines with any of these forms of
3239 the @code{list} command. You can change this using @code{set listsize}:
3240
3241 @table @code
3242 @item set listsize @var{count}
3243 @kindex set listsize
3244 Make the @code{list} command display @var{count} source lines (unless
3245 the @code{list} argument explicitly specifies some other number).
3246
3247 @item show listsize
3248 @kindex show listsize
3249 Display the number of lines that @code{list} will currently display by
3250 default.
3251 @end table
3252
3253 Repeating a @code{list} command with @key{RET} discards the argument,
3254 so it is equivalent to typing just @code{list}. This is more useful
3255 than listing the same lines again. An exception is made for an
3256 argument of @samp{-}; that argument is preserved in repetition so that
3257 each repetition moves up in the source file.
3258
3259 @cindex linespec
3260 In general, the @code{list} command expects you to supply zero, one or two
3261 @dfn{linespecs}. Linespecs specify source lines; there are several ways
3262 of writing them but the effect is always to specify some source line.
3263 Here is a complete description of the possible arguments for @code{list}:
3264
3265 @table @code
3266 @item list @var{linespec}
3267 Print lines centered around the line specified by @var{linespec}.
3268
3269 @item list @var{first},@var{last}
3270 Print lines from @var{first} to @var{last}. Both arguments are
3271 linespecs.
3272
3273 @item list ,@var{last}
3274 Print lines ending with @var{last}.
3275
3276 @item list @var{first},
3277 Print lines starting with @var{first}.
3278
3279 @item list +
3280 Print lines just after the lines last printed.
3281
3282 @item list -
3283 Print lines just before the lines last printed.
3284
3285 @item list
3286 As described in the preceding table.
3287 @end table
3288
3289 Here are the ways of specifying a single source line---all the
3290 kinds of linespec.
3291
3292 @table @code
3293 @item @var{number}
3294 Specifies line @var{number} of the current source file.
3295 When a @code{list} command has two linespecs, this refers to
3296 the same source file as the first linespec.
3297
3298 @item +@var{offset}
3299 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines after the last line printed.
3300 When used as the second linespec in a @code{list} command that has
3301 two, this specifies the line @var{offset} lines down from the
3302 first linespec.
3303
3304 @item -@var{offset}
3305 Specifies the line @var{offset} lines before the last line printed.
3306
3307 @item @var{filename}:@var{number}
3308 Specifies line @var{number} in the source file @var{filename}.
3309
3310 @item @var{function}
3311 @c FIXME: "of the open-brace" is C-centric. When we add other langs...
3312 Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
3313 function @var{function}.
3314
3315 @item @var{filename}:@var{function}
3316 Specifies the line of the open-brace that begins the body of the
3317 function @var{function} in the file @var{filename}. You only need the
3318 file name with a function name to avoid ambiguity when there are
3319 identically named functions in different source files.
3320
3321 @item *@var{address}
3322 Specifies the line containing the program address @var{address}.
3323 @var{address} may be any expression.
3324 @end table
3325
3326 @node Search, Source Path, List, Source
3327 @section Searching Source Files
3328 @cindex searching
3329 @kindex reverse-search
3330
3331 There are two commands for searching through the current source file for a
3332 regular expression.
3333
3334 @table @code
3335 @item forward-search @var{regexp}
3336 @itemx search @var{regexp}
3337 @kindex search
3338 @kindex forward-search
3339 The command @samp{forward-search @var{regexp}} checks each line,
3340 starting with the one following the last line listed, for a match for
3341 @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can use
3342 synonym @samp{search @var{regexp}} or abbreviate the command name as
3343 @code{fo}.
3344
3345 @item reverse-search @var{regexp}
3346 The command @samp{reverse-search @var{regexp}} checks each line, starting
3347 with the one before the last line listed and going backward, for a match
3348 for @var{regexp}. It lists the line that is found. You can abbreviate
3349 this command as @code{rev}.
3350 @end table
3351
3352 @node Source Path, Machine Code, Search, Source
3353 @section Specifying Source Directories
3354
3355 @cindex source path
3356 @cindex directories for source files
3357 Executable programs sometimes do not record the directories of the source
3358 files from which they were compiled, just the names. Even when they do,
3359 the directories could be moved between the compilation and your debugging
3360 session. _GDBN__ has a list of directories to search for source files;
3361 this is called the @dfn{source path}. Each time _GDBN__ wants a source file,
3362 it tries all the directories in the list, in the order they are present
3363 in the list, until it finds a file with the desired name. Note that
3364 the executable search path is @emph{not} used for this purpose. Neither is
3365 the current working directory, unless it happens to be in the source
3366 path.
3367
3368 If _GDBN__ cannot find a source file in the source path, and the object
3369 program records a directory, _GDBN__ tries that directory too. If the
3370 source path is empty, and there is no record of the compilation
3371 directory, _GDBN__ will, as a last resort, look in the current
3372 directory.
3373
3374 Whenever you reset or rearrange the source path, _GDBN__ will clear out
3375 any information it has cached about where source files are found, where
3376 each line is in the file, etc.
3377
3378 @kindex directory
3379 When you start _GDBN__, its source path is empty.
3380 To add other directories, use the @code{directory} command.
3381
3382 @table @code
3383 @item directory @var{dirname} @dots{}
3384 Add directory @var{dirname} to the front of the source path. Several
3385 directory names may be given to this command, separated by @samp{:} or
3386 whitespace. You may specify a directory that is already in the source
3387 path; this moves it forward, so it will be searched sooner.
3388
3389 You can use the string @samp{$cdir} to refer to the compilation
3390 directory (if one is recorded), and @samp{$cwd} to refer to the current
3391 working directory. @samp{$cwd} is not the same as @samp{.}---the former
3392 tracks the current working directory as it changes during your _GDBN__
3393 session, while the latter is immediately expanded to the current
3394 directory at the time you add an entry to the source path.
3395
3396 @item directory
3397 Reset the source path to empty again. This requires confirmation.
3398
3399 @c RET-repeat for @code{directory} is explicitly disabled, but since
3400 @c repeating it would be a no-op we do not say that. (thanks to RMS)
3401
3402 @item show directories
3403 @kindex show directories
3404 Print the source path: show which directories it contains.
3405 @end table
3406
3407 If your source path is cluttered with directories that are no longer of
3408 interest, _GDBN__ may sometimes cause confusion by finding the wrong
3409 versions of source. You can correct the situation as follows:
3410
3411 @enumerate
3412 @item
3413 Use @code{directory} with no argument to reset the source path to empty.
3414
3415 @item
3416 Use @code{directory} with suitable arguments to reinstall the
3417 directories you want in the source path. You can add all the
3418 directories in one command.
3419 @end enumerate
3420
3421 @node Machine Code, , Source Path, Source
3422 @section Source and Machine Code
3423
3424 You can use the command @code{info line} to map source lines to program
3425 addresses (and viceversa), and the command @code{disassemble} to display
3426 a range of addresses as machine instructions.
3427
3428 @table @code
3429 @item info line @var{linespec}
3430 @kindex info line
3431 Print the starting and ending addresses of the compiled code for
3432 source line @var{linespec}. You can specify source lines in any of
3433 the ways understood by the @code{list} command (@pxref{List, ,Printing
3434 Source Lines}).
3435 @end table
3436
3437 For example, we can use @code{info line} to discover the location of
3438 the object code for the first line of function
3439 @code{m4_changequote}:
3440
3441 @smallexample
3442 (_GDBP__) info line m4_changecom
3443 Line 895 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x634c and ends at 0x6350.
3444 @end smallexample
3445
3446 @noindent
3447 We can also inquire (using @code{*@var{addr}} as the form for
3448 @var{linespec}) what source line covers a particular address:
3449 @smallexample
3450 (_GDBP__) info line *0x63ff
3451 Line 926 of "builtin.c" starts at pc 0x63e4 and ends at 0x6404.
3452 @end smallexample
3453
3454 @cindex @code{$_} and @code{info line}
3455 After @code{info line}, the default address for the @code{x} command
3456 is changed to the starting address of the line, so that @samp{x/i} is
3457 sufficient to begin examining the machine code (@pxref{Memory,
3458 ,Examining Memory}). Also, this address is saved as the value of the
3459 convenience variable @code{$_} (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
3460 Variables}).
3461
3462 @table @code
3463 @kindex disassemble
3464 @item disassemble
3465 This specialized command dumps a range of memory as machine
3466 instructions. The default memory range is the function surrounding the
3467 program counter of the selected frame. A single argument to this
3468 command is a program counter value; the function surrounding this value
3469 will be dumped. Two arguments specify a range of addresses (first
3470 inclusive, second exclusive) to dump.
3471 @end table
3472
3473 We can use @code{disassemble} to inspect the object code
3474 range shown in the last @code{info line} example:
3475
3476 @smallexample
3477 (_GDBP__) disas 0x63e4 0x6404
3478 Dump of assembler code from 0x63e4 to 0x6404:
3479 0x63e4 <builtin_init+5340>: ble 0x63f8 <builtin_init+5360>
3480 0x63e8 <builtin_init+5344>: sethi %hi(0x4c00), %o0
3481 0x63ec <builtin_init+5348>: ld [%i1+4], %o0
3482 0x63f0 <builtin_init+5352>: b 0x63fc <builtin_init+5364>
3483 0x63f4 <builtin_init+5356>: ld [%o0+4], %o0
3484 0x63f8 <builtin_init+5360>: or %o0, 0x1a4, %o0
3485 0x63fc <builtin_init+5364>: call 0x9288 <path_search>
3486 0x6400 <builtin_init+5368>: nop
3487 End of assembler dump.
3488 @end smallexample
3489
3490 @node Data, Languages, Source, Top
3491 @chapter Examining Data
3492
3493 @cindex printing data
3494 @cindex examining data
3495 @kindex print
3496 @kindex inspect
3497 @c "inspect" is not quite a synonym if you are using Epoch, which we do not
3498 @c document because it is nonstandard... Under Epoch it displays in a
3499 @c different window or something like that.
3500 The usual way to examine data in your program is with the @code{print}
3501 command (abbreviated @code{p}), or its synonym @code{inspect}. It
3502 evaluates and prints the value of an expression of the language your
3503 program is written in (@pxref{Languages, ,Using _GDBN__ with Different
3504 Languages}).
3505
3506 @table @code
3507 @item print @var{exp}
3508 @itemx print /@var{f} @var{exp}
3509 @var{exp} is an expression (in the source language). By default
3510 the value of @var{exp} is printed in a format appropriate to its data
3511 type; you can choose a different format by specifying @samp{/@var{f}},
3512 where @var{f} is a letter specifying the format; @pxref{Output formats}.
3513
3514 @item print
3515 @itemx print /@var{f}
3516 If you omit @var{exp}, _GDBN__ displays the last value again (from the
3517 @dfn{value history}; @pxref{Value History, ,Value History}). This allows you to
3518 conveniently inspect the same value in an alternative format.
3519 @end table
3520
3521 A more low-level way of examining data is with the @code{x} command.
3522 It examines data in memory at a specified address and prints it in a
3523 specified format. @xref{Memory, ,Examining Memory}.
3524
3525 If you are interested in information about types, or about how the fields
3526 of a struct or class are declared, use the @code{ptype @var{exp}}
3527 command rather than @code{print}. @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
3528
3529 @menu
3530 * Expressions:: Expressions
3531 * Variables:: Program Variables
3532 * Arrays:: Artificial Arrays
3533 * Output formats:: Output formats
3534 * Memory:: Examining Memory
3535 * Auto Display:: Automatic Display
3536 * Print Settings:: Print Settings
3537 * Value History:: Value History
3538 * Convenience Vars:: Convenience Variables
3539 * Registers:: Registers
3540 * Floating Point Hardware:: Floating Point Hardware
3541 @end menu
3542
3543 @node Expressions, Variables, Data, Data
3544 @section Expressions
3545
3546 @cindex expressions
3547 @code{print} and many other _GDBN__ commands accept an expression and
3548 compute its value. Any kind of constant, variable or operator defined
3549 by the programming language you are using is legal in an expression in
3550 _GDBN__. This includes conditional expressions, function calls, casts
3551 and string constants. It unfortunately does not include symbols defined
3552 by preprocessor @code{#define} commands.
3553
3554 Because C is so widespread, most of the expressions shown in examples in
3555 this manual are in C. @xref{Languages, , Using _GDBN__ with Different
3556 Languages}, for information on how to use expressions in other
3557 languages.
3558
3559 In this section, we discuss operators that you can use in _GDBN__
3560 expressions regardless of your programming language.
3561
3562 Casts are supported in all languages, not just in C, because it is so
3563 useful to cast a number into a pointer so as to examine a structure
3564 at that address in memory.
3565 @c FIXME: casts supported---Mod2 true?
3566
3567 _GDBN__ supports these operators in addition to those of programming
3568 languages:
3569
3570 @table @code
3571 @item @@
3572 @samp{@@} is a binary operator for treating parts of memory as arrays.
3573 @xref{Arrays, ,Artificial Arrays}, for more information.
3574
3575 @item ::
3576 @samp{::} allows you to specify a variable in terms of the file or
3577 function where it is defined. @xref{Variables, ,Program Variables}.
3578
3579 @item @{@var{type}@} @var{addr}
3580 Refers to an object of type @var{type} stored at address @var{addr} in
3581 memory. @var{addr} may be any expression whose value is an integer or
3582 pointer (but parentheses are required around binary operators, just as in
3583 a cast). This construct is allowed regardless of what kind of data is
3584 normally supposed to reside at @var{addr}.
3585 @end table
3586
3587 @node Variables, Arrays, Expressions, Data
3588 @section Program Variables
3589
3590 The most common kind of expression to use is the name of a variable
3591 in your program.
3592
3593 Variables in expressions are understood in the selected stack frame
3594 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a Frame}); they must either be global
3595 (or static) or be visible according to the scope rules of the
3596 programming language from the point of execution in that frame. This
3597 means that in the function
3598
3599 @example
3600 foo (a)
3601 int a;
3602 @{
3603 bar (a);
3604 @{
3605 int b = test ();
3606 bar (b);
3607 @}
3608 @}
3609 @end example
3610
3611 @noindent
3612 the variable @code{a} is usable whenever your program is executing
3613 within the function @code{foo}, but the variable @code{b} is visible
3614 only while your program is executing inside the block in which @code{b}
3615 is declared.
3616
3617 @cindex variable name conflict
3618 There is an exception: you can refer to a variable or function whose
3619 scope is a single source file even if the current execution point is not
3620 in this file. But it is possible to have more than one such variable or
3621 function with the same name (in different source files). If that
3622 happens, referring to that name has unpredictable effects. If you wish,
3623 you can specify a static variable in a particular function or file,
3624 using the colon-colon notation:
3625
3626 @cindex colon-colon
3627 @iftex
3628 @c info cannot cope with a :: index entry, but why deprive hard copy readers?
3629 @kindex ::
3630 @end iftex
3631 @example
3632 @var{file}::@var{variable}
3633 @var{function}::@var{variable}
3634 @end example
3635
3636 @noindent
3637 Here @var{file} or @var{function} is the name of the context for the
3638 static @var{variable}. In the case of file names, you can use quotes to
3639 make sure _GDBN__ parses the file name as a single word---for example,
3640 to print a global value of @code{x} defined in @file{f2.c}:
3641
3642 @example
3643 (_GDBP__) p 'f2.c'::x
3644 @end example
3645
3646 @cindex C++ scope resolution
3647 This use of @samp{::} is very rarely in conflict with the very similar
3648 use of the same notation in C++. _GDBN__ also supports use of the C++
3649 scope resolution operator in _GDBN__ expressions.
3650
3651 @cindex wrong values
3652 @cindex variable values, wrong
3653 @quotation
3654 @emph{Warning:} Occasionally, a local variable may appear to have the
3655 wrong value at certain points in a function---just after entry to the
3656 function, and just before exit. You may see this problem when you are
3657 stepping by machine instructions. This is because on most machines, it
3658 takes more than one instruction to set up a stack frame (including local
3659 variable definitions); if you are stepping by machine instructions,
3660 variables may appear to have the wrong values until the stack frame is
3661 completely built. On function exit, it usually also takes more than one
3662 machine instruction to destroy a stack frame; after you begin stepping
3663 through that group of instructions, local variable definitions may be
3664 gone.
3665 @end quotation
3666
3667 @node Arrays, Output formats, Variables, Data
3668 @section Artificial Arrays
3669
3670 @cindex artificial array
3671 @kindex @@
3672 It is often useful to print out several successive objects of the
3673 same type in memory; a section of an array, or an array of
3674 dynamically determined size for which only a pointer exists in the
3675 program.
3676
3677 This can be done by constructing an @dfn{artificial array} with the
3678 binary operator @samp{@@}. The left operand of @samp{@@} should be
3679 the first element of the desired array, as an individual object.
3680 The right operand should be the desired length of the array. The result is
3681 an array value whose elements are all of the type of the left argument.
3682 The first element is actually the left argument; the second element
3683 comes from bytes of memory immediately following those that hold the
3684 first element, and so on. Here is an example. If a program says
3685
3686 @example
3687 int *array = (int *) malloc (len * sizeof (int));
3688 @end example
3689
3690 @noindent
3691 you can print the contents of @code{array} with
3692
3693 @example
3694 p *array@@len
3695 @end example
3696
3697 The left operand of @samp{@@} must reside in memory. Array values made
3698 with @samp{@@} in this way behave just like other arrays in terms of
3699 subscripting, and are coerced to pointers when used in expressions.
3700 Artificial arrays most often appear in expressions via the value history
3701 (@pxref{Value History, ,Value History}), after printing one out.)
3702
3703 Sometimes the artificial array mechanism is not quite enough; in
3704 moderately complex data structures, the elements of interest may not
3705 actually be adjacent---for example, if you are interested in the values
3706 of pointers in an array. One useful work-around in this situation is
3707 to use a convenience variable (@pxref{Convenience Vars, ,Convenience
3708 Variables}) as a counter in an expression that prints the first
3709 interesting value, and then repeat that expression via @key{RET}. For
3710 instance, suppose you have an array @code{dtab} of pointers to
3711 structures, and you are interested in the values of a field @code{fv}
3712 in each structure. Here is an example of what you might type:
3713
3714 @example
3715 set $i = 0
3716 p dtab[$i++]->fv
3717 @key{RET}
3718 @key{RET}
3719 @dots{}
3720 @end example
3721
3722 @node Output formats, Memory, Arrays, Data
3723 @section Output formats
3724
3725 @cindex formatted output
3726 @cindex output formats
3727 By default, _GDBN__ prints a value according to its data type. Sometimes
3728 this is not what you want. For example, you might want to print a number
3729 in hex, or a pointer in decimal. Or you might want to view data in memory
3730 at a certain address as a character string or as an instruction. To do
3731 these things, specify an @dfn{output format} when you print a value.
3732
3733 The simplest use of output formats is to say how to print a value
3734 already computed. This is done by starting the arguments of the
3735 @code{print} command with a slash and a format letter. The format
3736 letters supported are:
3737
3738 @table @code
3739 @item x
3740 Regard the bits of the value as an integer, and print the integer in
3741 hexadecimal.
3742
3743 @item d
3744 Print as integer in signed decimal.
3745
3746 @item u
3747 Print as integer in unsigned decimal.
3748
3749 @item o
3750 Print as integer in octal.
3751
3752 @item t
3753 Print as integer in binary. The letter @samp{t} stands for ``two''.
3754
3755 @item a
3756 Print as an address, both absolute in hex and as an offset from the
3757 nearest preceding symbol. This format can be used to discover where (in
3758 what function) an unknown address is located:
3759
3760 @example
3761 (_GDBP__) p/a 0x54320
3762 _0__$3 = 0x54320 <_initialize_vx+396>_1__
3763 @end example
3764
3765 @item c
3766 Regard as an integer and print it as a character constant.
3767
3768 @item f
3769 Regard the bits of the value as a floating point number and print
3770 using typical floating point syntax.
3771 @end table
3772
3773 For example, to print the program counter in hex (@pxref{Registers}), type
3774
3775 @example
3776 p/x $pc
3777 @end example
3778
3779 @noindent
3780 Note that no space is required before the slash; this is because command
3781 names in _GDBN__ cannot contain a slash.
3782
3783 To reprint the last value in the value history with a different format,
3784 you can use the @code{print} command with just a format and no
3785 expression. For example, @samp{p/x} reprints the last value in hex.
3786
3787 @node Memory, Auto Display, Output formats, Data
3788 @section Examining Memory
3789
3790 You can use the command @code{x} (for ``examine'') to examine memory in
3791 any of several formats, independently of your program's data types.
3792
3793 @cindex examining memory
3794 @table @code
3795 @kindex x
3796 @item x/@var{nfu} @var{addr}
3797 @itemx x @var{addr}
3798 @itemx x
3799 Use the command @code{x} to examine memory.
3800 @end table
3801
3802 @var{n}, @var{f}, and @var{u} are all optional parameters that specify how
3803 much memory to display and how to format it; @var{addr} is an
3804 expression giving the address where you want to start displaying memory.
3805 If you use defaults for @var{nfu}, you need not type the slash @samp{/}.
3806 Several commands set convenient defaults for @var{addr}.
3807
3808 @table @r
3809 @item @var{n}, the repeat count
3810 The repeat count is a decimal integer; the default is 1. It specifies
3811 how much memory (counting by units @var{u}) to display.
3812 @c This really is **decimal**; unaffected by 'set radix' as of GDB
3813 @c 4.1.2.
3814
3815 @item @var{f}, the display format
3816 The display format is one of the formats used by @code{print},
3817 or @samp{s} (null-terminated string) or @samp{i} (machine instruction).
3818 The default is @samp{x} (hexadecimal) initially, or the format from the
3819 last time you used either @code{x} or @code{print}.
3820
3821 @item @var{u}, the unit size
3822 The unit size is any of
3823 @table @code
3824 @item b
3825 Bytes.
3826 @item h
3827 Halfwords (two bytes).
3828 @item w
3829 Words (four bytes). This is the initial default.
3830 @item g
3831 Giant words (eight bytes).
3832 @end table
3833
3834 Each time you specify a unit size with @code{x}, that size becomes the
3835 default unit the next time you use @code{x}. (For the @samp{s} and
3836 @samp{i} formats, the unit size is ignored and is normally not written.)
3837
3838 @item @var{addr}, starting display address
3839 @var{addr} is the address where you want _GDBN__ to begin displaying
3840 memory. The expression need not have a pointer value (though it may);
3841 it is always interpreted as an integer address of a byte of memory.
3842 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on expressions. The default for
3843 @var{addr} is usually just after the last address examined---but several
3844 other commands also set the default address: @code{info breakpoints} (to
3845 the address of the last breakpoint listed), @code{info line} (to the
3846 starting address of a line), and @code{print} (if you use it to display
3847 a value from memory).
3848 @end table
3849
3850 For example, @samp{x/3uh 0x54320} is a request to display three halfwords
3851 (@code{h}) of memory, formatted as unsigned decimal integers (@samp{u}),
3852 starting at address @code{0x54320}. @samp{x/4xw $sp} prints the four
3853 words (@samp{w}) of memory above the stack pointer (here, @samp{$sp};
3854 @pxref{Registers}) in hexadecimal (@samp{x}).
3855
3856 Since the letters indicating unit sizes are all distinct from the
3857 letters specifying output formats, you do not have to remember whether
3858 unit size or format comes first; either order will work. The output
3859 specifications @samp{4xw} and @samp{4wx} mean exactly the same thing.
3860 (However, the count @var{n} must come first; @samp{wx4} will not work.)
3861
3862 Even though the unit size @var{u} is ignored for the formats @samp{s}
3863 and @samp{i}, you might still want to use a count @var{n}; for example,
3864 @samp{3i} specifies that you want to see three machine instructions,
3865 including any operands. The command @code{disassemble} gives an
3866 alternative way of inspecting machine instructions; @pxref{Machine
3867 Code}.
3868
3869 All the defaults for the arguments to @code{x} are designed to make it
3870 easy to continue scanning memory with minimal specifications each time
3871 you use @code{x}. For example, after you have inspected three machine
3872 instructions with @samp{x/3i @var{addr}}, you can inspect the next seven
3873 with just @samp{x/7}. If you use @key{RET} to repeat the @code{x} command,
3874 the repeat count @var{n} is used again; the other arguments default as
3875 for successive uses of @code{x}.
3876
3877 @cindex @code{$_}, @code{$__}, and value history
3878 The addresses and contents printed by the @code{x} command are not saved
3879 in the value history because there is often too much of them and they
3880 would get in the way. Instead, _GDBN__ makes these values available for
3881 subsequent use in expressions as values of the convenience variables
3882 @code{$_} and @code{$__}. After an @code{x} command, the last address
3883 examined is available for use in expressions in the convenience variable
3884 @code{$_}. The contents of that address, as examined, are available in
3885 the convenience variable @code{$__}.
3886
3887 If the @code{x} command has a repeat count, the address and contents saved
3888 are from the last memory unit printed; this is not the same as the last
3889 address printed if several units were printed on the last line of output.
3890
3891 @node Auto Display, Print Settings, Memory, Data
3892 @section Automatic Display
3893 @cindex automatic display
3894 @cindex display of expressions
3895
3896 If you find that you want to print the value of an expression frequently
3897 (to see how it changes), you might want to add it to the @dfn{automatic
3898 display list} so that _GDBN__ will print its value each time your program stops.
3899 Each expression added to the list is given a number to identify it;
3900 to remove an expression from the list, you specify that number.
3901 The automatic display looks like this:
3902
3903 @example
3904 2: foo = 38
3905 3: bar[5] = (struct hack *) 0x3804
3906 @end example
3907
3908 @noindent
3909 showing item numbers, expressions and their current values. As with
3910 displays you request manually using @code{x} or @code{print}, you can
3911 specify the output format you prefer; in fact, @code{display} decides
3912 whether to use @code{print} or @code{x} depending on how elaborate your
3913 format specification is---it uses @code{x} if you specify a unit size,
3914 or one of the two formats (@samp{i} and @samp{s}) that are only
3915 supported by @code{x}; otherwise it uses @code{print}.
3916
3917 @table @code
3918 @item display @var{exp}
3919 @kindex display
3920 Add the expression @var{exp} to the list of expressions to display
3921 each time your program stops. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
3922
3923 @code{display} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
3924
3925 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{exp}
3926 For @var{fmt} specifying only a display format and not a size or
3927 count, add the expression @var{exp} to the auto-display list but
3928 arranges to display it each time in the specified format @var{fmt}.
3929 @xref{Output formats}.
3930
3931 @item display/@var{fmt} @var{addr}
3932 For @var{fmt} @samp{i} or @samp{s}, or including a unit-size or a
3933 number of units, add the expression @var{addr} as a memory address to
3934 be examined each time your program stops. Examining means in effect
3935 doing @samp{x/@var{fmt} @var{addr}}. @xref{Memory, ,Examining Memory}.
3936 @end table
3937
3938 For example, @samp{display/i $pc} can be helpful, to see the machine
3939 instruction about to be executed each time execution stops (@samp{$pc}
3940 is a common name for the program counter; @pxref{Registers}).
3941
3942 @table @code
3943 @item undisplay @var{dnums}@dots{}
3944 @itemx delete display @var{dnums}@dots{}
3945 @kindex delete display
3946 @kindex undisplay
3947 Remove item numbers @var{dnums} from the list of expressions to display.
3948
3949 @code{undisplay} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
3950 (Otherwise you would just get the error @samp{No display number @dots{}}.)
3951
3952 @item disable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
3953 @kindex disable display
3954 Disable the display of item numbers @var{dnums}. A disabled display
3955 item is not printed automatically, but is not forgotten. It may be
3956 enabled again later.
3957
3958 @item enable display @var{dnums}@dots{}
3959 @kindex enable display
3960 Enable display of item numbers @var{dnums}. It becomes effective once
3961 again in auto display of its expression, until you specify otherwise.
3962
3963 @item display
3964 Display the current values of the expressions on the list, just as is
3965 done when your program stops.
3966
3967 @item info display
3968 @kindex info display
3969 Print the list of expressions previously set up to display
3970 automatically, each one with its item number, but without showing the
3971 values. This includes disabled expressions, which are marked as such.
3972 It also includes expressions which would not be displayed right now
3973 because they refer to automatic variables not currently available.
3974 @end table
3975
3976 If a display expression refers to local variables, then it does not make
3977 sense outside the lexical context for which it was set up. Such an
3978 expression is disabled when execution enters a context where one of its
3979 variables is not defined. For example, if you give the command
3980 @code{display last_char} while inside a function with an argument
3981 @code{last_char}, then this argument will be displayed while your program
3982 continues to stop inside that function. When it stops elsewhere---where
3983 there is no variable @code{last_char}---display is disabled. The next time
3984 your program stops where @code{last_char} is meaningful, you can enable the
3985 display expression once again.
3986
3987 @node Print Settings, Value History, Auto Display, Data
3988 @section Print Settings
3989
3990 @cindex format options
3991 @cindex print settings
3992 _GDBN__ provides the following ways to control how arrays, structures,
3993 and symbols are printed.
3994
3995 @noindent
3996 These settings are useful for debugging programs in any language:
3997
3998 @table @code
3999 @item set print address
4000 @item set print address on
4001 @kindex set print address
4002 _GDBN__ will print memory addresses showing the location of stack
4003 traces, structure values, pointer values, breakpoints, and so forth,
4004 even when it also displays the contents of those addresses. The default
4005 is on. For example, this is what a stack frame display looks like, with
4006 @code{set print address on}:
4007
4008 @smallexample
4009 @group
4010 (_GDBP__) f
4011 #0 set_quotes (lq=0x34c78 "<<", rq=0x34c88 ">>")
4012 at input.c:530
4013 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
4014 @end group
4015 @end smallexample
4016
4017 @item set print address off
4018 Do not print addresses when displaying their contents. For example,
4019 this is the same stack frame displayed with @code{set print address off}:
4020
4021 @example
4022 @group
4023 (_GDBP__) set print addr off
4024 (_GDBP__) f
4025 #0 set_quotes (lq="<<", rq=">>") at input.c:530
4026 530 if (lquote != def_lquote)
4027 @end group
4028 @end example
4029
4030 @item show print address
4031 @kindex show print address
4032 Show whether or not addresses are to be printed.
4033
4034 @item set print array
4035 @itemx set print array on
4036 @kindex set print array
4037 _GDBN__ will pretty print arrays. This format is more convenient to read,
4038 but uses more space. The default is off.
4039
4040 @item set print array off.
4041 Return to compressed format for arrays.
4042
4043 @item show print array
4044 @kindex show print array
4045 Show whether compressed or pretty format is selected for displaying
4046 arrays.
4047
4048 @item set print elements @var{number-of-elements}
4049 @kindex set print elements
4050 If _GDBN__ is printing a large array, it will stop printing after it has
4051 printed the number of elements set by the @code{set print elements} command.
4052 This limit also applies to the display of strings.
4053
4054 @item show print elements
4055 @kindex show print elements
4056 Display the number of elements of a large array that _GDBN__ will print
4057 before losing patience.
4058
4059 @item set print pretty on
4060 @kindex set print pretty
4061 Cause _GDBN__ to print structures in an indented format with one member per
4062 line, like this:
4063
4064 @example
4065 @group
4066 $1 = @{
4067 next = 0x0,
4068 flags = @{
4069 sweet = 1,
4070 sour = 1
4071 @},
4072 meat = 0x54 "Pork"
4073 @}
4074 @end group
4075 @end example
4076
4077 @item set print pretty off
4078 Cause _GDBN__ to print structures in a compact format, like this:
4079
4080 @smallexample
4081 @group
4082 $1 = @{next = 0x0, flags = @{sweet = 1, sour = 1@}, \
4083 meat = 0x54 "Pork"@}
4084 @end group
4085 @end smallexample
4086
4087 @noindent
4088 This is the default format.
4089
4090 @item show print pretty
4091 @kindex show print pretty
4092 Show which format _GDBN__ will use to print structures.
4093
4094 @item set print sevenbit-strings on
4095 @kindex set print sevenbit-strings
4096 Print using only seven-bit characters; if this option is set,
4097 _GDBN__ will display any eight-bit characters (in strings or character
4098 values) using the notation @code{\}@var{nnn}. For example, @kbd{M-a} is
4099 displayed as @code{\341}.
4100
4101 @item set print sevenbit-strings off
4102 Print using either seven-bit or eight-bit characters, as required. This
4103 is the default.
4104
4105 @item show print sevenbit-strings
4106 @kindex show print sevenbit-strings
4107 Show whether or not _GDBN__ will print only seven-bit characters.
4108
4109 @item set print union on
4110 @kindex set print union
4111 Tell _GDBN__ to print unions which are contained in structures. This is the
4112 default setting.
4113
4114 @item set print union off
4115 Tell _GDBN__ not to print unions which are contained in structures.
4116
4117 @item show print union
4118 @kindex show print union
4119 Ask _GDBN__ whether or not it will print unions which are contained in
4120 structures.
4121
4122 For example, given the declarations
4123
4124 @smallexample
4125 typedef enum @{Tree, Bug@} Species;
4126 typedef enum @{Big_tree, Acorn, Seedling@} Tree_forms;
4127 typedef enum @{Caterpillar, Cocoon, Butterfly@}
4128 Bug_forms;
4129
4130 struct thing @{
4131 Species it;
4132 union @{
4133 Tree_forms tree;
4134 Bug_forms bug;
4135 @} form;
4136 @};
4137
4138 struct thing foo = @{Tree, @{Acorn@}@};
4139 @end smallexample
4140
4141 @noindent
4142 with @code{set print union on} in effect @samp{p foo} would print
4143
4144 @smallexample
4145 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{tree = Acorn, bug = Cocoon@}@}
4146 @end smallexample
4147
4148 @noindent
4149 and with @code{set print union off} in effect it would print
4150
4151 @smallexample
4152 $1 = @{it = Tree, form = @{...@}@}
4153 @end smallexample
4154 @end table
4155
4156 @noindent
4157 These settings are of interest when debugging C++ programs:
4158
4159 @table @code
4160 @item set print demangle
4161 @itemx set print demangle on
4162 @kindex set print demangle
4163 Print C++ names in their source form rather than in the mangled form
4164 in which they are passed to the assembler and linker for type-safe linkage.
4165 The default is on.
4166
4167 @item show print demangle
4168 @kindex show print demangle
4169 Show whether C++ names will be printed in mangled or demangled form.
4170
4171 @item set print asm-demangle
4172 @itemx set print asm-demangle on
4173 @kindex set print asm-demangle
4174 Print C++ names in their source form rather than their mangled form, even
4175 in assembler code printouts such as instruction disassemblies.
4176 The default is off.
4177
4178 @item show print asm-demangle
4179 @kindex show print asm-demangle
4180 Show whether C++ names in assembly listings will be printed in mangled
4181 or demangled form.
4182
4183 @item set print object
4184 @itemx set print object on
4185 @kindex set print object
4186 When displaying a pointer to an object, identify the @emph{actual}
4187 (derived) type of the object rather than the @emph{declared} type, using
4188 the virtual function table.
4189
4190 @item set print object off
4191 Display only the declared type of objects, without reference to the
4192 virtual function table. This is the default setting.
4193
4194 @item show print object
4195 @kindex show print object
4196 Show whether actual, or declared, object types will be displayed.
4197
4198 @item set print vtbl
4199 @itemx set print vtbl on
4200 @kindex set print vtbl
4201 Pretty print C++ virtual function tables. The default is off.
4202
4203 @item set print vtbl off
4204 Do not pretty print C++ virtual function tables.
4205
4206 @item show print vtbl
4207 @kindex show print vtbl
4208 Show whether C++ virtual function tables are pretty printed, or not.
4209 @end table
4210
4211 @node Value History, Convenience Vars, Print Settings, Data
4212 @section Value History
4213
4214 @cindex value history
4215 Values printed by the @code{print} command are saved in _GDBN__'s @dfn{value
4216 history} so that you can refer to them in other expressions. Values are
4217 kept until the symbol table is re-read or discarded (for example with
4218 the @code{file} or @code{symbol-file} commands). When the symbol table
4219 changes, the value history is discarded, since the values may contain
4220 pointers back to the types defined in the symbol table.
4221
4222 @cindex @code{$}
4223 @cindex @code{$$}
4224 @cindex history number
4225 The values printed are given @dfn{history numbers} for you to refer to them
4226 by. These are successive integers starting with one. @code{print} shows you
4227 the history number assigned to a value by printing @samp{$@var{num} = }
4228 before the value; here @var{num} is the history number.
4229
4230 To refer to any previous value, use @samp{$} followed by the value's
4231 history number. The way @code{print} labels its output is designed to
4232 remind you of this. Just @code{$} refers to the most recent value in
4233 the history, and @code{$$} refers to the value before that.
4234 @code{$$@var{n}} refers to the @var{n}th value from the end; @code{$$2}
4235 is the value just prior to @code{$$}, @code{$$1} is equivalent to
4236 @code{$$}, and @code{$$0} is equivalent to @code{$}.
4237
4238 For example, suppose you have just printed a pointer to a structure and
4239 want to see the contents of the structure. It suffices to type
4240
4241 @example
4242 p *$
4243 @end example
4244
4245 If you have a chain of structures where the component @code{next} points
4246 to the next one, you can print the contents of the next one with this:
4247
4248 @example
4249 p *$.next
4250 @end example
4251
4252 @noindent
4253 You can print successive links in the chain by repeating this
4254 command---which you can do by just typing @key{RET}.
4255
4256 Note that the history records values, not expressions. If the value of
4257 @code{x} is 4 and you type these commands:
4258
4259 @example
4260 print x
4261 set x=5
4262 @end example
4263
4264 @noindent
4265 then the value recorded in the value history by the @code{print} command
4266 remains 4 even though the value of @code{x} has changed.
4267
4268 @table @code
4269 @kindex show values
4270 @item show values
4271 Print the last ten values in the value history, with their item numbers.
4272 This is like @samp{p@ $$9} repeated ten times, except that @code{show
4273 values} does not change the history.
4274
4275 @item show values @var{n}
4276 Print ten history values centered on history item number @var{n}.
4277
4278 @item show values +
4279 Print ten history values just after the values last printed. If no more
4280 values are available, produces no display.
4281 @end table
4282
4283 Pressing @key{RET} to repeat @code{show values @var{n}} has exactly the
4284 same effect as @samp{show values +}.
4285
4286 @node Convenience Vars, Registers, Value History, Data
4287 @section Convenience Variables
4288
4289 @cindex convenience variables
4290 _GDBN__ provides @dfn{convenience variables} that you can use within
4291 _GDBN__ to hold on to a value and refer to it later. These variables
4292 exist entirely within _GDBN__; they are not part of your program, and
4293 setting a convenience variable has no direct effect on further execution
4294 of your program. That is why you can use them freely.
4295
4296 Convenience variables are prefixed with @samp{$}. Any name preceded by
4297 @samp{$} can be used for a convenience variable, unless it is one of
4298 the predefined machine-specific register names (@pxref{Registers}).
4299 (Value history references, in contrast, are @emph{numbers} preceded
4300 by @samp{$}. @xref{Value History, ,Value History}.)
4301
4302 You can save a value in a convenience variable with an assignment
4303 expression, just as you would set a variable in your program. Example:
4304
4305 @example
4306 set $foo = *object_ptr
4307 @end example
4308
4309 @noindent
4310 would save in @code{$foo} the value contained in the object pointed to by
4311 @code{object_ptr}.
4312
4313 Using a convenience variable for the first time creates it; but its value
4314 is @code{void} until you assign a new value. You can alter the value with
4315 another assignment at any time.
4316
4317 Convenience variables have no fixed types. You can assign a convenience
4318 variable any type of value, including structures and arrays, even if
4319 that variable already has a value of a different type. The convenience
4320 variable, when used as an expression, has the type of its current value.
4321
4322 @table @code
4323 @item show convenience
4324 @kindex show convenience
4325 Print a list of convenience variables used so far, and their values.
4326 Abbreviated @code{show con}.
4327 @end table
4328
4329 One of the ways to use a convenience variable is as a counter to be
4330 incremented or a pointer to be advanced. For example, to print
4331 a field from successive elements of an array of structures:
4332
4333 _0__@example
4334 set $i = 0
4335 print bar[$i++]->contents
4336 @i{@dots{} repeat that command by typing @key{RET}.}
4337 _1__@end example
4338
4339 Some convenience variables are created automatically by _GDBN__ and given
4340 values likely to be useful.
4341
4342 @table @code
4343 @item $_
4344 @kindex $_
4345 The variable @code{$_} is automatically set by the @code{x} command to
4346 the last address examined (@pxref{Memory, ,Examining Memory}). Other
4347 commands which provide a default address for @code{x} to examine also
4348 set @code{$_} to that address; these commands include @code{info line}
4349 and @code{info breakpoint}. The type of @code{$_} is @code{void *}
4350 except when set by the @code{x} command, in which case it is a pointer
4351 to the type of @code{$__}.
4352
4353 @item $__
4354 @kindex $__
4355 The variable @code{$__} is automatically set by the @code{x} command
4356 to the value found in the last address examined. Its type is chosen
4357 to match the format in which the data was printed.
4358 @end table
4359
4360 @node Registers, Floating Point Hardware, Convenience Vars, Data
4361 @section Registers
4362
4363 @cindex registers
4364 You can refer to machine register contents, in expressions, as variables
4365 with names starting with @samp{$}. The names of registers are different
4366 for each machine; use @code{info registers} to see the names used on
4367 your machine.
4368
4369 @table @code
4370 @item info registers
4371 @kindex info registers
4372 Print the names and values of all registers except floating-point
4373 registers (in the selected stack frame).
4374
4375 @item info all-registers
4376 @kindex info all-registers
4377 @cindex floating point registers
4378 Print the names and values of all registers, including floating-point
4379 registers.
4380
4381 @item info registers @var{regname}
4382 Print the relativized value of register @var{regname}. @var{regname}
4383 may be any register name valid on the machine you are using, with
4384 or without the initial @samp{$}.
4385 @end table
4386
4387 _GDBN__ has four ``standard'' register names that are available (in
4388 expressions) on most machines---whenever they do not conflict with an
4389 architecture's canonical mnemonics for registers. The register names
4390 @code{$pc} and @code{$sp} are used for the program counter register and
4391 the stack pointer. @code{$fp} is used for a register that contains a
4392 pointer to the current stack frame, and @code{$ps} is used for a
4393 register that contains the processor status. For example,
4394 you could print the program counter in hex with
4395
4396 @example
4397 p/x $pc
4398 @end example
4399
4400 @noindent
4401 or print the instruction to be executed next with
4402
4403 @example
4404 x/i $pc
4405 @end example
4406
4407 @noindent
4408 or add four to the stack pointer @footnote{This is a way of removing
4409 one word from the stack, on machines where stacks grow downward in
4410 memory (most machines, nowadays). This assumes that the innermost
4411 stack frame is selected; setting @code{$sp} is not allowed when other
4412 stack frames are selected. To pop entire frames off the stack,
4413 regardless of machine architecture, use @code{return};
4414 @pxref{Returning, ,Returning from a Function}.} with
4415
4416 @example
4417 set $sp += 4
4418 @end example
4419
4420 Whenever possible, these four standard register names are available on
4421 your machine even though the machine has different canonical mnemonics,
4422 so long as there is no conflict. The @code{info registers} command
4423 shows the canonical names. For example, on the SPARC, @code{info
4424 registers} displays the processor status register as @code{$psr} but you
4425 can also refer to it as @code{$ps}.
4426
4427 _GDBN__ always considers the contents of an ordinary register as an
4428 integer when the register is examined in this way. Some machines have
4429 special registers which can hold nothing but floating point; these
4430 registers are considered to have floating point values. There is no way
4431 to refer to the contents of an ordinary register as floating point value
4432 (although you can @emph{print} it as a floating point value with
4433 @samp{print/f $@var{regname}}).
4434
4435 Some registers have distinct ``raw'' and ``virtual'' data formats. This
4436 means that the data format in which the register contents are saved by
4437 the operating system is not the same one that your program normally
4438 sees. For example, the registers of the 68881 floating point
4439 coprocessor are always saved in ``extended'' (raw) format, but all C
4440 programs expect to work with ``double'' (virtual) format. In such
4441 cases, _GDBN__ normally works with the virtual format only (the format that
4442 makes sense for your program), but the @code{info registers} command
4443 prints the data in both formats.
4444
4445 Normally, register values are relative to the selected stack frame
4446 (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a Frame}). This means that you get the
4447 value that the register would contain if all stack frames farther in
4448 were exited and their saved registers restored. In order to see the
4449 true contents of hardware registers, you must select the innermost
4450 frame (with @samp{frame 0}).
4451
4452 However, _GDBN__ must deduce where registers are saved, from the machine
4453 code generated by your compiler. If some registers are not saved, or if
4454 _GDBN__ is unable to locate the saved registers, the selected stack
4455 frame will make no difference.
4456
4457 _if__(_AMD29K__)
4458 @table @code
4459 @item set rstack_high_address @var{address}
4460 @kindex set rstack_high_address
4461 @cindex AMD 29K register stack
4462 @cindex register stack, AMD29K
4463 On AMD 29000 family processors, registers are saved in a separate
4464 ``register stack''. There is no way for _GDBN__ to determine the extent
4465 of this stack. Normally, _GDBN__ just assumes that the stack is ``large
4466 enough''. This may result in _GDBN__ referencing memory locations that
4467 don't exist. If necessary, you can get around this problem by
4468 specifying the ending address of the register stack with the @code{set
4469 rstack_high_address} command. The argument should be an address, which
4470 you will probably want to precede with @samp{0x} to specify in
4471 hexadecimal.
4472
4473 @item show rstack_high_address
4474 @kindex show rstack_high_address
4475 Display the current limit of the register stack, on AMD 29000 family
4476 processors.
4477 @end table
4478 _fi__(_AMD29K__)
4479
4480 @node Floating Point Hardware, , Registers, Data
4481 @section Floating Point Hardware
4482 @cindex floating point
4483
4484 Depending on the host machine architecture, _GDBN__ may be able to give
4485 you more information about the status of the floating point hardware.
4486
4487 @table @code
4488 @item info float
4489 @kindex info float
4490 If available, provides hardware-dependent information about the floating
4491 point unit. The exact contents and layout vary depending on the
4492 floating point chip.
4493 @end table
4494 @c FIXME: this is a cop-out. Try to get examples, explanations. Only
4495 @c FIXME...supported currently on arm's and 386's. Mark properly with
4496 @c FIXME... m4 macros to isolate general statements from hardware-dep,
4497 @c FIXME... at that point.
4498
4499 @node Languages, Symbols, Data, Top
4500 @chapter Using _GDBN__ with Different Languages
4501 @cindex languages
4502
4503 Although programming languages generally have common aspects, they are
4504 rarely expressed in the same manner. For instance, in ANSI C,
4505 dereferencing a pointer @code{p} is accomplished by @code{*p}, but in
4506 Modula-2, it is accomplished by @code{p^}. Values can also be
4507 represented (and displayed) differently. Hex numbers in C are written
4508 like @samp{0x1ae}, while in Modula-2 they appear as @samp{1AEH}.
4509
4510 @cindex working language
4511 Language-specific information is built into _GDBN__ for some languages,
4512 allowing you to express operations like the above in your program's
4513 native language, and allowing _GDBN__ to output values in a manner
4514 consistent with the syntax of your program's native language. The
4515 language you use to build expressions, called the @dfn{working
4516 language}, can be selected manually, or _GDBN__ can set it
4517 automatically.
4518
4519 @menu
4520 * Setting:: Switching between source languages
4521 * Show:: Displaying the language
4522 * Checks:: Type and Range checks
4523 * Support:: Supported languages
4524 @end menu
4525
4526 @node Setting, Show, Languages, Languages
4527 @section Switching between source languages
4528
4529 There are two ways to control the working language---either have _GDBN__
4530 set it automatically, or select it manually yourself. You can use the
4531 @code{set language} command for either purpose. On startup, _GDBN__
4532 defaults to setting the language automatically.
4533
4534 @menu
4535 * Manually:: Setting the working language manually
4536 * Automatically:: Having _GDBN__ infer the source language
4537 @end menu
4538
4539 @node Manually, Automatically, Setting, Setting
4540 @subsection Setting the working language
4541
4542 @kindex set language
4543 To set the language, issue the command @samp{set language @var{lang}},
4544 where @var{lang} is the name of a language: @code{c} or @code{modula-2}.
4545 For a list of the supported languages, type @samp{set language}.
4546
4547 Setting the language manually prevents _GDBN__ from updating the working
4548 language automatically. This can lead to confusion if you try
4549 to debug a program when the working language is not the same as the
4550 source language, when an expression is acceptable to both
4551 languages---but means different things. For instance, if the current
4552 source file were written in C, and _GDBN__ was parsing Modula-2, a
4553 command such as:
4554
4555 @example
4556 print a = b + c
4557 @end example
4558
4559 @noindent
4560 might not have the effect you intended. In C, this means to add
4561 @code{b} and @code{c} and place the result in @code{a}. The result
4562 printed would be the value of @code{a}. In Modula-2, this means to compare
4563 @code{a} to the result of @code{b+c}, yielding a @code{BOOLEAN} value.
4564
4565 If you allow _GDBN__ to set the language automatically, then
4566 you can count on expressions evaluating the same way in your debugging
4567 session and in your program.
4568
4569 @node Automatically, , Manually, Setting
4570 @subsection Having _GDBN__ infer the source language
4571
4572 To have _GDBN__ set the working language automatically, use @samp{set
4573 language local} or @samp{set language auto}. _GDBN__ then infers the
4574 language that a program was written in by looking at the name of its
4575 source files, and examining their extensions:
4576
4577 @table @file
4578 @item *.mod
4579 Modula-2 source file
4580
4581 @item *.c
4582 C source file
4583
4584 @item *.C
4585 @itemx *.cc
4586 C++ source file
4587 @end table
4588
4589 This information is recorded for each function or procedure in a source
4590 file. When your program stops in a frame (usually by encountering a
4591 breakpoint), _GDBN__ sets the working language to the language recorded
4592 for the function in that frame. If the language for a frame is unknown
4593 (that is, if the function or block corresponding to the frame was
4594 defined in a source file that does not have a recognized extension), the
4595 current working language is not changed, and _GDBN__ issues a warning.
4596
4597 This may not seem necessary for most programs, which are written
4598 entirely in one source language. However, program modules and libraries
4599 written in one source language can be used by a main program written in
4600 a different source language. Using @samp{set language auto} in this
4601 case frees you from having to set the working language manually.
4602
4603 @node Show, Checks, Setting, Languages
4604 @section Displaying the language
4605
4606 The following commands will help you find out which language is the
4607 working language, and also what language source files were written in.
4608
4609 @kindex show language
4610 @kindex info frame
4611 @kindex info source
4612 @table @code
4613 @item show language
4614 Display the current working language. This is the
4615 language you can use with commands such as @code{print} to
4616 build and compute expressions that may involve variables in your program.
4617
4618 @item info frame
4619 Among the other information listed here (@pxref{Frame Info, ,Information
4620 about a Frame}) is the source language for this frame. This is the
4621 language that will become the working language if you ever use an
4622 identifier that is in this frame.
4623
4624 @item info source
4625 Among the other information listed here (@pxref{Symbols, ,Examining the
4626 Symbol Table}) is the source language of this source file.
4627 @end table
4628
4629 @node Checks, Support, Show, Languages
4630 @section Type and range Checking
4631
4632 @quotation
4633 @emph{Warning:} In this release, the _GDBN__ commands for type and range
4634 checking are included, but they do not yet have any effect. This
4635 section documents the intended facilities.
4636 @end quotation
4637 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range code added
4638
4639 Some languages are designed to guard you against making seemingly common
4640 errors through a series of compile- and run-time checks. These include
4641 checking the type of arguments to functions and operators, and making
4642 sure mathematical overflows are caught at run time. Checks such as
4643 these help to ensure a program's correctness once it has been compiled
4644 by eliminating type mismatches, and providing active checks for range
4645 errors when your program is running.
4646
4647 _GDBN__ can check for conditions like the above if you wish.
4648 Although _GDBN__ will not check the statements in your program, it
4649 can check expressions entered directly into _GDBN__ for evaluation via
4650 the @code{print} command, for example. As with the working language,
4651 _GDBN__ can also decide whether or not to check automatically based on
4652 your program's source language. @xref{Support, ,Supported Languages},
4653 for the default settings of supported languages.
4654
4655 @menu
4656 * Type Checking:: An overview of type checking
4657 * Range Checking:: An overview of range checking
4658 @end menu
4659
4660 @cindex type checking
4661 @cindex checks, type
4662 @node Type Checking, Range Checking, Checks, Checks
4663 @subsection An overview of type checking
4664
4665 Some languages, such as Modula-2, are strongly typed, meaning that the
4666 arguments to operators and functions have to be of the correct type,
4667 otherwise an error occurs. These checks prevent type mismatch
4668 errors from ever causing any run-time problems. For example,
4669
4670 @example
4671 1 + 2 @result{} 3
4672 @exdent but
4673 @error{} 1 + 2.3
4674 @end example
4675
4676 The second example fails because the @code{CARDINAL} 1 is not
4677 type-compatible with the @code{REAL} 2.3.
4678
4679 For expressions you use in _GDBN__ commands, you can tell the _GDBN__
4680 type checker to skip checking; to treat any mismatches as errors and
4681 abandon the expression; or only issue warnings when type mismatches
4682 occur, but evaluate the expression anyway. When you choose the last of
4683 these, _GDBN__ evaluates expressions like the second example above, but
4684 also issues a warning.
4685
4686 Even though you may turn type checking off, other type-based reasons may
4687 prevent _GDBN__ from evaluating an expression. For instance, _GDBN__ does not
4688 know how to add an @code{int} and a @code{struct foo}. These particular
4689 type errors have nothing to do with the language in use, and usually
4690 arise from expressions, such as the one described above, which make
4691 little sense to evaluate anyway.
4692
4693 Each language defines to what degree it is strict about type. For
4694 instance, both Modula-2 and C require the arguments to arithmetical
4695 operators to be numbers. In C, enumerated types and pointers can be
4696 represented as numbers, so that they are valid arguments to mathematical
4697 operators. @xref{Support, ,Supported Languages}, for further
4698 details on specific languages.
4699
4700 _GDBN__ provides some additional commands for controlling the type checker:
4701
4702 @kindex set check
4703 @kindex set check type
4704 @kindex show check type
4705 @table @code
4706 @item set check type auto
4707 Set type checking on or off based on the current working language.
4708 @xref{Support, ,Supported Languages}, for the default settings for
4709 each language.
4710
4711 @item set check type on
4712 @itemx set check type off
4713 Set type checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
4714 current working language. Issue a warning if the setting does not
4715 match the language's default. If any type mismatches occur in
4716 evaluating an expression while typechecking is on, _GDBN__ prints a
4717 message and aborts evaluation of the expression.
4718
4719 @item set check type warn
4720 Cause the type checker to issue warnings, but to always attempt to
4721 evaluate the expression. Evaluating the expression may still
4722 be impossible for other reasons. For example, _GDBN__ cannot add
4723 numbers and structures.
4724
4725 @item show type
4726 Show the current setting of the type checker, and whether or not _GDBN__ is
4727 setting it automatically.
4728 @end table
4729
4730 @cindex range checking
4731 @cindex checks, range
4732 @node Range Checking, , Type Checking, Checks
4733 @subsection An overview of Range Checking
4734
4735 In some languages (such as Modula-2), it is an error to exceed the
4736 bounds of a type; this is enforced with run-time checks. Such range
4737 checking is meant to ensure program correctness by making sure
4738 computations do not overflow, or indices on an array element access do
4739 not exceed the bounds of the array.
4740
4741 For expressions you use in _GDBN__ commands, you can tell _GDBN__ to
4742 ignore range errors; to always treat them as errors and abandon the
4743 expression; or to issue warnings when a range error occurs but evaluate
4744 the expression anyway.
4745
4746 A range error can result from numerical overflow, from exceeding an
4747 array index bound, or when you type in a constant that is not a member
4748 of any type. Some languages, however, do not treat overflows as an
4749 error. In many implementations of C, mathematical overflow causes the
4750 result to ``wrap around'' to lower values---for example, if @var{m} is
4751 the largest integer value, and @var{s} is the smallest, then
4752
4753 @example
4754 @var{m} + 1 @result{} @var{s}
4755 @end example
4756
4757 This, too, is specific to individual languages, and in some cases
4758 specific to individual compilers or machines. @xref{Support, ,
4759 Supported Languages}, for further details on specific languages.
4760
4761 _GDBN__ provides some additional commands for controlling the range checker:
4762
4763 @kindex set check
4764 @kindex set check range
4765 @kindex show check range
4766 @table @code
4767 @item set check range auto
4768 Set range checking on or off based on the current working language.
4769 @xref{Support, ,Supported Languages}, for the default settings for
4770 each language.
4771
4772 @item set check range on
4773 @itemx set check range off
4774 Set range checking on or off, overriding the default setting for the
4775 current working language. A warning is issued if the setting does not
4776 match the language's default. If a range error occurs, then a message
4777 is printed and evaluation of the expression is aborted.
4778
4779 @item set check range warn
4780 Output messages when the _GDBN__ range checker detects a range error,
4781 but attempt to evaluate the expression anyway. Evaluating the
4782 expression may still be impossible for other reasons, such as accessing
4783 memory that the process does not own (a typical example from many UNIX
4784 systems).
4785
4786 @item show range
4787 Show the current setting of the range checker, and whether or not it is
4788 being set automatically by _GDBN__.
4789 @end table
4790
4791 @node Support, , Checks, Languages
4792 @section Supported Languages
4793
4794 _GDBN__ 4 supports C, C++, and Modula-2. Some _GDBN__
4795 features may be used in expressions regardless of the language you
4796 use: the _GDBN__ @code{@@} and @code{::} operators, and the
4797 @samp{@{type@}addr} construct (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}) can be
4798 used with the constructs of any of the supported languages.
4799
4800 The following sections detail to what degree each of these
4801 source languages is supported by _GDBN__. These sections are
4802 not meant to be language tutorials or references, but serve only as a
4803 reference guide to what the _GDBN__ expression parser will accept, and
4804 what input and output formats should look like for different languages.
4805 There are many good books written on each of these languages; please
4806 look to these for a language reference or tutorial.
4807
4808 @menu
4809 * C:: C and C++
4810 * Modula-2:: Modula-2
4811 @end menu
4812
4813 @node C, Modula-2, Support, Support
4814 @subsection C and C++
4815 @cindex C and C++
4816
4817 @cindex expressions in C or C++
4818 Since C and C++ are so closely related, many features of _GDBN__ apply
4819 to both languages. Whenever this is the case, we discuss both languages
4820 together.
4821
4822 @cindex C++
4823 @kindex g++
4824 @cindex GNU C++
4825 The C++ debugging facilities are jointly implemented by the GNU C++
4826 compiler and _GDBN__. Therefore, to debug your C++ code effectively,
4827 you must compile your C++ programs with the GNU C++ compiler,
4828 @code{g++}.
4829
4830 @menu
4831 * C Operators:: C and C++ Operators
4832 * C Constants:: C and C++ Constants
4833 * Cplusplus expressions:: C++ Expressions
4834 * C Defaults:: Default settings for C and C++
4835 * C Checks:: C and C++ Type and Range Checks
4836 * Debugging C:: _GDBN__ and C
4837 * Debugging C plus plus:: Special features for C++
4838 @end menu
4839
4840 @cindex C and C++ operators
4841 @node C Operators, C Constants, C, C
4842 @subsubsection C and C++ Operators
4843
4844 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
4845 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
4846 often defined on groups of types. For the purposes of C and C++, the
4847 following definitions hold:
4848
4849 @itemize @bullet
4850 @item
4851 @emph{Integral types} include @code{int} with any of its storage-class
4852 specifiers, @code{char}, and @code{enum}s.
4853
4854 @item
4855 @emph{Floating-point types} include @code{float} and @code{double}.
4856
4857 @item
4858 @emph{Pointer types} include all types defined as @code{(@var{type}
4859 *)}.
4860
4861 @item
4862 @emph{Scalar types} include all of the above.
4863 @end itemize
4864
4865 @noindent
4866 The following operators are supported. They are listed here
4867 in order of increasing precedence:
4868
4869 @table @code
4870 _0__@item ,
4871 The comma or sequencing operator. Expressions in a comma-separated list
4872 are evaluated from left to right, with the result of the entire
4873 expression being the last expression evaluated.
4874
4875 @item =
4876 Assignment. The value of an assignment expression is the value
4877 assigned. Defined on scalar types.
4878
4879 @item @var{op}=
4880 Used in an expression of the form @w{@code{@var{a} @var{op}= @var{b}}},
4881 and translated to @w{@code{@var{a} = @var{a op b}}}.
4882 @w{@code{@var{op}=}} and @code{=} have the same precendence.
4883 @var{op} is any one of the operators @code{|}, @code{^}, @code{&},
4884 @code{<<}, @code{>>}, @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{%}.
4885
4886 @item ?:
4887 The ternary operator. @code{@var{a} ? @var{b} : @var{c}} can be thought
4888 of as: if @var{a} then @var{b} else @var{c}. @var{a} should be of an
4889 integral type.
4890
4891 @item ||
4892 Logical @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
4893
4894 @item &&
4895 Logical @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
4896
4897 @item |
4898 Bitwise @sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
4899
4900 @item ^
4901 Bitwise exclusive-@sc{or}. Defined on integral types.
4902
4903 @item &
4904 Bitwise @sc{and}. Defined on integral types.
4905
4906 @item ==@r{, }!=
4907 Equality and inequality. Defined on scalar types. The value of these
4908 expressions is 0 for false and non-zero for true.
4909
4910 @item <@r{, }>@r{, }<=@r{, }>=
4911 Less than, greater than, less than or equal, greater than or equal.
4912 Defined on scalar types. The value of these expressions is 0 for false
4913 and non-zero for true.
4914
4915 @item <<@r{, }>>
4916 left shift, and right shift. Defined on integral types.
4917
4918 @item @@
4919 The _GDBN__ ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
4920
4921 @item +@r{, }-
4922 Addition and subtraction. Defined on integral types, floating-point types and
4923 pointer types.
4924
4925 @item *@r{, }/@r{, }%
4926 Multiplication, division, and modulus. Multiplication and division are
4927 defined on integral and floating-point types. Modulus is defined on
4928 integral types.
4929
4930 @item ++@r{, }--
4931 Increment and decrement. When appearing before a variable, the
4932 operation is performed before the variable is used in an expression;
4933 when appearing after it, the variable's value is used before the
4934 operation takes place.
4935
4936 @item *
4937 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types. Same precedence as
4938 @code{++}.
4939
4940 @item &
4941 Address operator. Defined on variables. Same precedence as @code{++}.
4942
4943 For debugging C++, _GDBN__ implements a use of @samp{&} beyond what's
4944 allowed in the C++ language itself: you can use @samp{&(&@var{ref})}
4945 (or, if you prefer, simply @samp{&&@var{ref}} to examine the address
4946 where a C++ reference variable (declared with @samp{&@var{ref}}) is
4947 stored.
4948
4949 @item -
4950 Negative. Defined on integral and floating-point types. Same
4951 precedence as @code{++}.
4952
4953 @item !
4954 Logical negation. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
4955 @code{++}.
4956
4957 @item ~
4958 Bitwise complement operator. Defined on integral types. Same precedence as
4959 @code{++}.
4960
4961 @item .@r{, }->
4962 Structure member, and pointer-to-structure member. For convenience,
4963 _GDBN__ regards the two as equivalent, choosing whether to dereference a
4964 pointer based on the stored type information.
4965 Defined on @code{struct}s and @code{union}s.
4966
4967 @item []
4968 Array indexing. @code{@var{a}[@var{i}]} is defined as
4969 @code{*(@var{a}+@var{i})}. Same precedence as @code{->}.
4970
4971 @item ()
4972 Function parameter list. Same precedence as @code{->}.
4973
4974 @item ::
4975 C++ scope resolution operator. Defined on
4976 @code{struct}, @code{union}, and @code{class} types.
4977
4978 @item ::
4979 The _GDBN__ scope operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). Same precedence as
4980 @code{::}, above._1__
4981 @end table
4982
4983 @cindex C and C++ constants
4984 @node C Constants, Cplusplus expressions, C Operators, C
4985 @subsubsection C and C++ Constants
4986
4987 _GDBN__ allows you to express the constants of C and C++ in the
4988 following ways:
4989
4990 @itemize @bullet
4991 @item
4992 Integer constants are a sequence of digits. Octal constants are
4993 specified by a leading @samp{0} (ie. zero), and hexadecimal constants by
4994 a leading @samp{0x} or @samp{0X}. Constants may also end with a letter
4995 @samp{l}, specifying that the constant should be treated as a
4996 @code{long} value.
4997
4998 @item
4999 Floating point constants are a sequence of digits, followed by a decimal
5000 point, followed by a sequence of digits, and optionally followed by an
5001 exponent. An exponent is of the form:
5002 @samp{@w{e@r{[[}+@r{]|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}}, where @var{nnn} is another
5003 sequence of digits. The @samp{+} is optional for positive exponents.
5004
5005 @item
5006 Enumerated constants consist of enumerated identifiers, or their
5007 integral equivalents.
5008
5009 @item
5010 Character constants are a single character surrounded by single quotes
5011 (@code{'}), or a number---the ordinal value of the corresponding character
5012 (usually its @sc{ASCII} value). Within quotes, the single character may
5013 be represented by a letter or by @dfn{escape sequences}, which are of
5014 the form @samp{\@var{nnn}}, where @var{nnn} is the octal representation
5015 of the character's ordinal value; or of the form @samp{\@var{x}}, where
5016 @samp{@var{x}} is a predefined special character---for example,
5017 @samp{\n} for newline.
5018
5019 @item
5020 String constants are a sequence of character constants surrounded
5021 by double quotes (@code{"}).
5022
5023 @item
5024 Pointer constants are an integral value.
5025 @end itemize
5026
5027 @node Cplusplus expressions, C Defaults, C Constants, C
5028 @subsubsection C++ Expressions
5029
5030 @cindex expressions in C++
5031 _GDBN__'s expression handling has a number of extensions to
5032 interpret a significant subset of C++ expressions.
5033
5034 @cindex C++ support, not in @sc{coff}
5035 @cindex @sc{coff} versus C++
5036 @cindex C++ and object formats
5037 @cindex object formats and C++
5038 @cindex a.out and C++
5039 @cindex @sc{ecoff} and C++
5040 @cindex @sc{xcoff} and C++
5041 @cindex @sc{elf}/stabs and C++
5042 @cindex @sc{elf}/@sc{dwarf} and C++
5043 @quotation
5044 @emph{Warning:} Most of these extensions depend on the use of additional
5045 debugging information in the symbol table, and thus require a rich,
5046 extendable object code format. In particular, if your system uses
5047 a.out, MIPS @sc{ecoff}, RS/6000 @sc{xcoff}, or Sun @sc{elf} with stabs
5048 extensions to the symbol table, these facilities are all available.
5049 Where the object code format is standard @sc{coff}, on the other hand,
5050 most of the C++ support in _GDBN__ will @emph{not} work, nor can it.
5051 For the standard SVr4 debugging format, @sc{dwarf} in @sc{elf}, the
5052 standard is still evolving, so the C++ support in _GDBN__ is still
5053 fragile; when this debugging format stabilizes, however, C++ support
5054 will also be available on systems that use it.
5055 @end quotation
5056
5057 @enumerate
5058
5059 @cindex member functions
5060 @item
5061 Member function calls are allowed; you can use expressions like
5062
5063 @example
5064 count = aml->GetOriginal(x, y)
5065 @end example
5066
5067 @kindex this
5068 @cindex namespace in C++
5069 @item
5070 While a member function is active (in the selected stack frame), your
5071 expressions have the same namespace available as the member function;
5072 that is, _GDBN__ allows implicit references to the class instance
5073 pointer @code{this} following the same rules as C++.
5074
5075 @cindex call overloaded functions
5076 @cindex type conversions in C++
5077 @item
5078 You can call overloaded functions; _GDBN__ will resolve the function
5079 call to the right definition, with one restriction---you must use
5080 arguments of the type required by the function that you want to call.
5081 _GDBN__ will not perform conversions requiring constructors or
5082 user-defined type operators.
5083
5084 @cindex reference declarations
5085 @item
5086 _GDBN__ understands variables declared as C++ references; you can use them in
5087 expressions just as you do in C++ source---they are automatically
5088 dereferenced.
5089
5090 In the parameter list shown when _GDBN__ displays a frame, the values of
5091 reference variables are not displayed (unlike other variables); this
5092 avoids clutter, since references are often used for large structures.
5093 The @emph{address} of a reference variable is always shown, unless
5094 you have specified @samp{set print address off}.
5095
5096 @item
5097 _GDBN__ supports the C++ name resolution operator @code{::}---your
5098 expressions can use it just as expressions in your program do. Since
5099 one scope may be defined in another, you can use @code{::} repeatedly if
5100 necessary, for example in an expression like
5101 @samp{@var{scope1}::@var{scope2}::@var{name}}. _GDBN__ also allows
5102 resolving name scope by reference to source files, in both C and C++
5103 debugging (@pxref{Variables, ,Program Variables}).
5104 @end enumerate
5105
5106 @node C Defaults, C Checks, Cplusplus expressions, C
5107 @subsubsection C and C++ Defaults
5108 @cindex C and C++ defaults
5109
5110 If you allow _GDBN__ to set type and range checking automatically, they
5111 both default to @code{off} whenever the working language changes to
5112 C or C++. This happens regardless of whether you, or _GDBN__,
5113 selected the working language.
5114
5115 If you allow _GDBN__ to set the language automatically, it sets the
5116 working language to C or C++ on entering code compiled from a source file
5117 whose name ends with @file{.c}, @file{.C}, or @file{.cc}.
5118 @xref{Automatically, ,Having _GDBN__ infer the source language}, for
5119 further details.
5120
5121 @node C Checks, Debugging C, C Defaults, C
5122 @subsubsection C and C++ Type and Range Checks
5123 @cindex C and C++ checks
5124
5125 @quotation
5126 @emph{Warning:} in this release, _GDBN__ does not yet perform type or
5127 range checking.
5128 @end quotation
5129 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range checks added
5130
5131 By default, when _GDBN__ parses C or C++ expressions, type checking
5132 is not used. However, if you turn type checking on, _GDBN__ will
5133 consider two variables type equivalent if:
5134
5135 @itemize @bullet
5136 @item
5137 The two variables are structured and have the same structure, union, or
5138 enumerated tag.
5139
5140 @item
5141 Two two variables have the same type name, or types that have been
5142 declared equivalent through @code{typedef}.
5143
5144 @ignore
5145 @c leaving this out because neither J Gilmore nor R Pesch understand it.
5146 @c FIXME--beers?
5147 @item
5148 The two @code{struct}, @code{union}, or @code{enum} variables are
5149 declared in the same declaration. (Note: this may not be true for all C
5150 compilers.)
5151 @end ignore
5152 @end itemize
5153
5154 Range checking, if turned on, is done on mathematical operations. Array
5155 indices are not checked, since they are often used to index a pointer
5156 that is not itself an array.
5157
5158 @node Debugging C, Debugging C plus plus, C Checks, C
5159 @subsubsection _GDBN__ and C
5160
5161 The @code{set print union} and @code{show print union} commands apply to
5162 the @code{union} type. When set to @samp{on}, any @code{union} that is
5163 inside a @code{struct} or @code{class} will also be printed.
5164 Otherwise, it will appear as @samp{@{...@}}.
5165
5166 The @code{@@} operator aids in the debugging of dynamic arrays, formed
5167 with pointers and a memory allocation function. (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions})
5168
5169 @node Debugging C plus plus, , Debugging C, C
5170 @subsubsection _GDBN__ Features for C++
5171
5172 @cindex commands for C++
5173 Some _GDBN__ commands are particularly useful with C++, and some are
5174 designed specifically for use with C++. Here is a summary:
5175
5176 @table @code
5177 @cindex break in overloaded functions
5178 @item @r{breakpoint menus}
5179 When you want a breakpoint in a function whose name is overloaded,
5180 _GDBN__'s breakpoint menus help you specify which function definition
5181 you want. @xref{Breakpoint Menus}.
5182
5183 @cindex overloading in C++
5184 @item rbreak @var{regex}
5185 Setting breakpoints using regular expressions is helpful for setting
5186 breakpoints on overloaded functions that are not members of any special
5187 classes.
5188 @xref{Set Breaks, ,Setting Breakpoints}.
5189
5190 @cindex C++ exception handling
5191 @item catch @var{exceptions}
5192 @itemx info catch
5193 Debug C++ exception handling using these commands. @xref{Exception
5194 Handling, ,Breakpoints and Exceptions}.
5195
5196 @cindex inheritance
5197 @item ptype @var{typename}
5198 Print inheritance relationships as well as other information for type
5199 @var{typename}.
5200 @xref{Symbols, ,Examining the Symbol Table}.
5201
5202 @cindex C++ symbol display
5203 @item set print demangle
5204 @itemx show print demangle
5205 @itemx set print asm-demangle
5206 @itemx show print asm-demangle
5207 Control whether C++ symbols display in their source form, both when
5208 displaying code as C++ source and when displaying disassemblies.
5209 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print Settings}.
5210
5211 @item set print object
5212 @itemx show print object
5213 Choose whether to print derived (actual) or declared types of objects.
5214 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print Settings}.
5215
5216 @item set print vtbl
5217 @itemx show print vtbl
5218 Control the format for printing virtual function tables.
5219 @xref{Print Settings, ,Print Settings}.
5220
5221 @item @r{Overloaded symbol names}
5222 You can specify a particular definition of an overloaded symbol, using
5223 the same notation that's used to declare such symbols in C++: type
5224 @code{@var{symbol}(@var{types})} rather than just @var{symbol}. You can
5225 also use _GDBN__'s command-line word completion facilities to list the
5226 available choices, or to finish the type list for you.
5227 @xref{Completion,, Command Completion}, for details on how to do this.
5228 @end table
5229
5230 @node Modula-2, , C, Support
5231 @subsection Modula-2
5232 @cindex Modula-2
5233
5234 The extensions made to _GDBN__ to support Modula-2 support output
5235 from the GNU Modula-2 compiler (which is currently being developed).
5236 Other Modula-2 compilers are not currently supported, and attempting to
5237 debug executables produced by them will most likely result in an error
5238 as _GDBN__ reads in the executable's symbol table.
5239
5240 @cindex expressions in Modula-2
5241 @menu
5242 * M2 Operators:: Built-in operators
5243 * Built-In Func/Proc:: Built-in Functions and Procedures
5244 * M2 Constants:: Modula-2 Constants
5245 * M2 Defaults:: Default settings for Modula-2
5246 * Deviations:: Deviations from standard Modula-2
5247 * M2 Checks:: Modula-2 Type and Range Checks
5248 * M2 Scope:: The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
5249 * GDB/M2:: _GDBN__ and Modula-2
5250 @end menu
5251
5252 @node M2 Operators, Built-In Func/Proc, Modula-2, Modula-2
5253 @subsubsection Operators
5254 @cindex Modula-2 operators
5255
5256 Operators must be defined on values of specific types. For instance,
5257 @code{+} is defined on numbers, but not on structures. Operators are
5258 often defined on groups of types. For the purposes of Modula-2, the
5259 following definitions hold:
5260
5261 @itemize @bullet
5262
5263 @item
5264 @emph{Integral types} consist of @code{INTEGER}, @code{CARDINAL}, and
5265 their subranges.
5266
5267 @item
5268 @emph{Character types} consist of @code{CHAR} and its subranges.
5269
5270 @item
5271 @emph{Floating-point types} consist of @code{REAL}.
5272
5273 @item
5274 @emph{Pointer types} consist of anything declared as @code{POINTER TO
5275 @var{type}}.
5276
5277 @item
5278 @emph{Scalar types} consist of all of the above.
5279
5280 @item
5281 @emph{Set types} consist of @code{SET}s and @code{BITSET}s.
5282
5283 @item
5284 @emph{Boolean types} consist of @code{BOOLEAN}.
5285 @end itemize
5286
5287 @noindent
5288 The following operators are supported, and appear in order of
5289 increasing precedence:
5290
5291 @table @code
5292 @item ,
5293 Function argument or array index separator.
5294 _0__
5295 @item :=
5296 Assignment. The value of @var{var} @code{:=} @var{value} is
5297 @var{value}.
5298
5299 @item <@r{, }>
5300 Less than, greater than on integral, floating-point, or enumerated
5301 types.
5302
5303 @item <=@r{, }>=
5304 Less than, greater than, less than or equal to, greater than or equal to
5305 on integral, floating-point and enumerated types, or set inclusion on
5306 set types. Same precedence as @code{<}.
5307
5308 @item =@r{, }<>@r{, }#
5309 Equality and two ways of expressing inequality, valid on scalar types.
5310 Same precedence as @code{<}. In _GDBN__ scripts, only @code{<>} is
5311 available for inequality, since @code{#} conflicts with the script
5312 comment character.
5313
5314 @item IN
5315 Set membership. Defined on set types and the types of their members.
5316 Same precedence as @code{<}.
5317
5318 @item OR
5319 Boolean disjunction. Defined on boolean types.
5320
5321 @item AND@r{, }&
5322 Boolean conjuction. Defined on boolean types.
5323
5324 @item @@
5325 The _GDBN__ ``artificial array'' operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}).
5326
5327 @item +@r{, }-
5328 Addition and subtraction on integral and floating-point types, or union
5329 and difference on set types.
5330
5331 @item *
5332 Multiplication on integral and floating-point types, or set intersection
5333 on set types.
5334
5335 @item /
5336 Division on floating-point types, or symmetric set difference on set
5337 types. Same precedence as @code{*}.
5338
5339 @item DIV@r{, }MOD
5340 Integer division and remainder. Defined on integral types. Same
5341 precedence as @code{*}.
5342
5343 @item -
5344 Negative. Defined on @code{INTEGER}s and @code{REAL}s.
5345
5346 @item ^
5347 Pointer dereferencing. Defined on pointer types.
5348
5349 @item NOT
5350 Boolean negation. Defined on boolean types. Same precedence as
5351 @code{^}.
5352
5353 @item .
5354 @code{RECORD} field selector. Defined on @code{RECORD}s. Same
5355 precedence as @code{^}.
5356
5357 @item []
5358 Array indexing. Defined on @code{ARRAY}s. Same precedence as @code{^}.
5359
5360 @item ()
5361 Procedure argument list. Defined on @code{PROCEDURE}s. Same precedence
5362 as @code{^}.
5363
5364 @item ::@r{, }.
5365 _GDBN__ and Modula-2 scope operators.
5366 @end table
5367
5368 @quotation
5369 @emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so _GDBN__
5370 will treat the use of the operator @code{IN}, or the use of operators
5371 @code{+}, @code{-}, @code{*}, @code{/}, @code{=}, , @code{<>}, @code{#},
5372 @code{<=}, and @code{>=} on sets as an error.
5373 @end quotation
5374 _1__
5375 @cindex Modula-2 built-ins
5376 @node Built-In Func/Proc, M2 Constants, M2 Operators, Modula-2
5377 @subsubsection Built-in Functions and Procedures
5378
5379 Modula-2 also makes available several built-in procedures and functions.
5380 In describing these, the following metavariables are used:
5381
5382 @table @var
5383
5384 @item a
5385 represents an @code{ARRAY} variable.
5386
5387 @item c
5388 represents a @code{CHAR} constant or variable.
5389
5390 @item i
5391 represents a variable or constant of integral type.
5392
5393 @item m
5394 represents an identifier that belongs to a set. Generally used in the
5395 same function with the metavariable @var{s}. The type of @var{s} should
5396 be @code{SET OF @var{mtype}} (where @var{mtype} is the type of @var{m}.
5397
5398 @item n
5399 represents a variable or constant of integral or floating-point type.
5400
5401 @item r
5402 represents a variable or constant of floating-point type.
5403
5404 @item t
5405 represents a type.
5406
5407 @item v
5408 represents a variable.
5409
5410 @item x
5411 represents a variable or constant of one of many types. See the
5412 explanation of the function for details.
5413 @end table
5414
5415 All Modula-2 built-in procedures also return a result, described below.
5416
5417 @table @code
5418 @item ABS(@var{n})
5419 Returns the absolute value of @var{n}.
5420
5421 @item CAP(@var{c})
5422 If @var{c} is a lower case letter, it returns its upper case
5423 equivalent, otherwise it returns its argument
5424
5425 @item CHR(@var{i})
5426 Returns the character whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
5427
5428 @item DEC(@var{v})
5429 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
5430
5431 @item DEC(@var{v},@var{i})
5432 Decrements the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
5433 new value.
5434
5435 @item EXCL(@var{m},@var{s})
5436 Removes the element @var{m} from the set @var{s}. Returns the new
5437 set.
5438
5439 @item FLOAT(@var{i})
5440 Returns the floating point equivalent of the integer @var{i}.
5441
5442 @item HIGH(@var{a})
5443 Returns the index of the last member of @var{a}.
5444
5445 @item INC(@var{v})
5446 Increments the value in the variable @var{v}. Returns the new value.
5447
5448 @item INC(@var{v},@var{i})
5449 Increments the value in the variable @var{v} by @var{i}. Returns the
5450 new value.
5451
5452 @item INCL(@var{m},@var{s})
5453 Adds the element @var{m} to the set @var{s} if it is not already
5454 there. Returns the new set.
5455
5456 @item MAX(@var{t})
5457 Returns the maximum value of the type @var{t}.
5458
5459 @item MIN(@var{t})
5460 Returns the minimum value of the type @var{t}.
5461
5462 @item ODD(@var{i})
5463 Returns boolean TRUE if @var{i} is an odd number.
5464
5465 @item ORD(@var{x})
5466 Returns the ordinal value of its argument. For example, the ordinal
5467 value of a character is its ASCII value (on machines supporting the
5468 ASCII character set). @var{x} must be of an ordered type, which include
5469 integral, character and enumerated types.
5470
5471 @item SIZE(@var{x})
5472 Returns the size of its argument. @var{x} can be a variable or a type.
5473
5474 @item TRUNC(@var{r})
5475 Returns the integral part of @var{r}.
5476
5477 @item VAL(@var{t},@var{i})
5478 Returns the member of the type @var{t} whose ordinal value is @var{i}.
5479 @end table
5480
5481 @quotation
5482 @emph{Warning:} Sets and their operations are not yet supported, so
5483 _GDBN__ will treat the use of procedures @code{INCL} and @code{EXCL} as
5484 an error.
5485 @end quotation
5486
5487 @cindex Modula-2 constants
5488 @node M2 Constants, M2 Defaults, Built-In Func/Proc, Modula-2
5489 @subsubsection Constants
5490
5491 _GDBN__ allows you to express the constants of Modula-2 in the following
5492 ways:
5493
5494 @itemize @bullet
5495
5496 @item
5497 Integer constants are simply a sequence of digits. When used in an
5498 expression, a constant is interpreted to be type-compatible with the
5499 rest of the expression. Hexadecimal integers are specified by a
5500 trailing @samp{H}, and octal integers by a trailing @samp{B}.
5501
5502 @item
5503 Floating point constants appear as a sequence of digits, followed by a
5504 decimal point and another sequence of digits. An optional exponent can
5505 then be specified, in the form @samp{E@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}}, where
5506 @samp{@r{[}+@r{|}-@r{]}@var{nnn}} is the desired exponent. All of the
5507 digits of the floating point constant must be valid decimal (base 10)
5508 digits.
5509
5510 @item
5511 Character constants consist of a single character enclosed by a pair of
5512 like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}). They may
5513 also be expressed by their ordinal value (their ASCII value, usually)
5514 followed by a @samp{C}.
5515
5516 @item
5517 String constants consist of a sequence of characters enclosed by a
5518 pair of like quotes, either single (@code{'}) or double (@code{"}).
5519 Escape sequences in the style of C are also allowed. @xref{C
5520 Constants, ,C and C++ Constants}, for a brief explanation of escape
5521 sequences.
5522
5523 @item
5524 Enumerated constants consist of an enumerated identifier.
5525
5526 @item
5527 Boolean constants consist of the identifiers @code{TRUE} and
5528 @code{FALSE}.
5529
5530 @item
5531 Pointer constants consist of integral values only.
5532
5533 @item
5534 Set constants are not yet supported.
5535 @end itemize
5536
5537 @node M2 Defaults, Deviations, M2 Constants, Modula-2
5538 @subsubsection Modula-2 Defaults
5539 @cindex Modula-2 defaults
5540
5541 If type and range checking are set automatically by _GDBN__, they
5542 both default to @code{on} whenever the working language changes to
5543 Modula-2. This happens regardless of whether you, or _GDBN__,
5544 selected the working language.
5545
5546 If you allow _GDBN__ to set the language automatically, then entering
5547 code compiled from a file whose name ends with @file{.mod} will set the
5548 working language to Modula-2. @xref{Automatically, ,Having _GDBN__ set
5549 the language automatically}, for further details.
5550
5551 @node Deviations, M2 Checks, M2 Defaults, Modula-2
5552 @subsubsection Deviations from Standard Modula-2
5553 @cindex Modula-2, deviations from
5554
5555 A few changes have been made to make Modula-2 programs easier to debug.
5556 This is done primarily via loosening its type strictness:
5557
5558 @itemize @bullet
5559 @item
5560 Unlike in standard Modula-2, pointer constants can be formed by
5561 integers. This allows you to modify pointer variables during
5562 debugging. (In standard Modula-2, the actual address contained in a
5563 pointer variable is hidden from you; it can only be modified
5564 through direct assignment to another pointer variable or expression that
5565 returned a pointer.)
5566
5567 @item
5568 C escape sequences can be used in strings and characters to represent
5569 non-printable characters. _GDBN__ will print out strings with these
5570 escape sequences embedded. Single non-printable characters are
5571 printed using the @samp{CHR(@var{nnn})} format.
5572
5573 @item
5574 The assignment operator (@code{:=}) returns the value of its right-hand
5575 argument.
5576
5577 @item
5578 All built-in procedures both modify @emph{and} return their argument.
5579 @end itemize
5580
5581 @node M2 Checks, M2 Scope, Deviations, Modula-2
5582 @subsubsection Modula-2 Type and Range Checks
5583 @cindex Modula-2 checks
5584
5585 @quotation
5586 @emph{Warning:} in this release, _GDBN__ does not yet perform type or
5587 range checking.
5588 @end quotation
5589 @c FIXME remove warning when type/range checks added
5590
5591 _GDBN__ considers two Modula-2 variables type equivalent if:
5592
5593 @itemize @bullet
5594 @item
5595 They are of types that have been declared equivalent via a @code{TYPE
5596 @var{t1} = @var{t2}} statement
5597
5598 @item
5599 They have been declared on the same line. (Note: This is true of the
5600 GNU Modula-2 compiler, but it may not be true of other compilers.)
5601 @end itemize
5602
5603 As long as type checking is enabled, any attempt to combine variables
5604 whose types are not equivalent is an error.
5605
5606 Range checking is done on all mathematical operations, assignment, array
5607 index bounds, and all built-in functions and procedures.
5608
5609 @node M2 Scope, GDB/M2, M2 Checks, Modula-2
5610 @subsubsection The scope operators @code{::} and @code{.}
5611 @cindex scope
5612 @kindex .
5613 @cindex colon, doubled as scope operator
5614 @ifinfo
5615 @kindex colon-colon
5616 @c Info cannot handoe :: but TeX can.
5617 @end ifinfo
5618 @iftex
5619 @kindex ::
5620 @end iftex
5621
5622 There are a few subtle differences between the Modula-2 scope operator
5623 (@code{.}) and the _GDBN__ scope operator (@code{::}). The two have
5624 similar syntax:
5625
5626 @example
5627
5628 @var{module} . @var{id}
5629 @var{scope} :: @var{id}
5630 @end example
5631
5632 @noindent
5633 where @var{scope} is the name of a module or a procedure,
5634 @var{module} the name of a module, and @var{id} is any declared
5635 identifier within your program, except another module.
5636
5637 Using the @code{::} operator makes _GDBN__ search the scope
5638 specified by @var{scope} for the identifier @var{id}. If it is not
5639 found in the specified scope, then _GDBN__ will search all scopes
5640 enclosing the one specified by @var{scope}.
5641
5642 Using the @code{.} operator makes _GDBN__ search the current scope for
5643 the identifier specified by @var{id} that was imported from the
5644 definition module specified by @var{module}. With this operator, it is
5645 an error if the identifier @var{id} was not imported from definition
5646 module @var{module}, or if @var{id} is not an identifier in
5647 @var{module}.
5648
5649 @node GDB/M2, , M2 Scope, Modula-2
5650 @subsubsection _GDBN__ and Modula-2
5651
5652 Some _GDBN__ commands have little use when debugging Modula-2 programs.
5653 Five subcommands of @code{set print} and @code{show print} apply
5654 specifically to C and C++: @samp{vtbl}, @samp{demangle},
5655 @samp{asm-demangle}, @samp{object}, and @samp{union}. The first four
5656 apply to C++, and the last to C's @code{union} type, which has no direct
5657 analogue in Modula-2.
5658
5659 The @code{@@} operator (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}), while available
5660 while using any language, is not useful with Modula-2. Its
5661 intent is to aid the debugging of @dfn{dynamic arrays}, which cannot be
5662 created in Modula-2 as they can in C or C++. However, because an
5663 address can be specified by an integral constant, the construct
5664 @samp{@{@var{type}@}@var{adrexp}} is still useful. (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions})
5665 _0__
5666 @cindex @code{#} in Modula-2
5667 In _GDBN__ scripts, the Modula-2 inequality operator @code{#} is
5668 interpreted as the beginning of a comment. Use @code{<>} instead.
5669 _1__
5670 @node Symbols, Altering, Languages, Top
5671 @chapter Examining the Symbol Table
5672
5673 The commands described in this section allow you to inquire about the
5674 symbols (names of variables, functions and types) defined in your
5675 program. This information is inherent in the text of your program and
5676 does not change as your program executes. _GDBN__ finds it in your
5677 program's symbol table, in the file indicated when you started _GDBN__
5678 (@pxref{File Options, ,Choosing Files}), or by one of the
5679 file-management commands (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to Specify Files}).
5680
5681 @c FIXME! This might be intentionally specific to C and C++; if so, move
5682 @c to someplace in C section of lang chapter.
5683 @cindex symbol names
5684 @cindex names of symbols
5685 @cindex quoting names
5686 Occasionally, you may need to refer to symbols that contain unusual
5687 characters, which _GDBN__ ordinarily treats as word delimiters. The
5688 most frequent case is in referring to static variables in other
5689 source files (@pxref{Variables,,Program Variables}). File names
5690 are recorded in object files as debugging symbols, but _GDBN__ would
5691 ordinarily parse a typical file name, like @file{foo.c}, as the three words
5692 @samp{foo} @samp{.} @samp{c}. To allow _GDBN__ to recognize
5693 @samp{foo.c} as a single symbol, enclose it in single quotes; for example,
5694
5695 @example
5696 p 'foo.c'::x
5697 @end example
5698
5699 @noindent
5700 looks up the value of @code{x} in the scope of the file @file{foo.c}.
5701
5702 @table @code
5703 @item info address @var{symbol}
5704 @kindex info address
5705 Describe where the data for @var{symbol} is stored. For a register
5706 variable, this says which register it is kept in. For a non-register
5707 local variable, this prints the stack-frame offset at which the variable
5708 is always stored.
5709
5710 Note the contrast with @samp{print &@var{symbol}}, which does not work
5711 at all for a register variables, and for a stack local variable prints
5712 the exact address of the current instantiation of the variable.
5713
5714 @item whatis @var{exp}
5715 @kindex whatis
5716 Print the data type of expression @var{exp}. @var{exp} is not
5717 actually evaluated, and any side-effecting operations (such as
5718 assignments or function calls) inside it do not take place.
5719 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}.
5720
5721 @item whatis
5722 Print the data type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
5723
5724 @item ptype @var{typename}
5725 @kindex ptype
5726 Print a description of data type @var{typename}. @var{typename} may be
5727 the name of a type, or for C code it may have the form
5728 @samp{struct @var{struct-tag}}, @samp{union @var{union-tag}} or
5729 @samp{enum @var{enum-tag}}.
5730
5731 @item ptype @var{exp}
5732 @itemx ptype
5733 Print a description of the type of expression @var{exp}. @code{ptype}
5734 differs from @code{whatis} by printing a detailed description, instead
5735 of just the name of the type. For example, if your program declares a
5736 variable as
5737
5738 @example
5739 struct complex @{double real; double imag;@} v;
5740 @end example
5741
5742 @noindent
5743 compare the output of the two commands:
5744
5745 @example
5746 @group
5747 (_GDBP__) whatis v
5748 type = struct complex
5749 (_GDBP__) ptype v
5750 type = struct complex @{
5751 double real;
5752 double imag;
5753 @}
5754 @end group
5755 @end example
5756
5757 @noindent
5758 As with @code{whatis}, using @code{ptype} without an argument refers to
5759 the type of @code{$}, the last value in the value history.
5760
5761 @item info types @var{regexp}
5762 @itemx info types
5763 @kindex info types
5764 Print a brief description of all types whose name matches @var{regexp}
5765 (or all types in your program, if you supply no argument). Each
5766 complete typename is matched as though it were a complete line; thus,
5767 @samp{i type value} gives information on all types in your program whose
5768 name includes the string @code{value}, but @samp{i type ^value$} gives
5769 information only on types whose complete name is @code{value}.
5770
5771 This command differs from @code{ptype} in two ways: first, like
5772 @code{whatis}, it does not print a detailed description; second, it
5773 lists all source files where a type is defined.
5774
5775 @item info source
5776 @kindex info source
5777 Show the name of the current source file---that is, the source file for
5778 the function containing the current point of execution---and the language
5779 it was written in.
5780
5781 @item info sources
5782 @kindex info sources
5783 Print the names of all source files in your program for which there is
5784 debugging information, organized into two lists: files whose symbols
5785 have already been read, and files whose symbols will be read when needed.
5786
5787 @item info functions
5788 @kindex info functions
5789 Print the names and data types of all defined functions.
5790
5791 @item info functions @var{regexp}
5792 Print the names and data types of all defined functions
5793 whose names contain a match for regular expression @var{regexp}.
5794 Thus, @samp{info fun step} finds all functions whose names
5795 include @code{step}; @samp{info fun ^step} finds those whose names
5796 start with @code{step}.
5797
5798 @item info variables
5799 @kindex info variables
5800 Print the names and data types of all variables that are declared
5801 outside of functions (i.e., excluding local variables).
5802
5803 @item info variables @var{regexp}
5804 Print the names and data types of all variables (except for local
5805 variables) whose names contain a match for regular expression
5806 @var{regexp}.
5807
5808 @ignore
5809 This was never implemented.
5810 @item info methods
5811 @itemx info methods @var{regexp}
5812 @kindex info methods
5813 The @code{info methods} command permits the user to examine all defined
5814 methods within C++ program, or (with the @var{regexp} argument) a
5815 specific set of methods found in the various C++ classes. Many
5816 C++ classes provide a large number of methods. Thus, the output
5817 from the @code{ptype} command can be overwhelming and hard to use. The
5818 @code{info-methods} command filters the methods, printing only those
5819 which match the regular-expression @var{regexp}.
5820 @end ignore
5821
5822 @ignore
5823 @c FIXME!! The following have been subsumed into a new "maint" command.
5824 @c restore descriptions in right place when details of maint available.
5825 @item printsyms @var{filename}
5826 @itemx printpsyms @var{filename}
5827 @itemx printmsyms @var{filename}
5828 @kindex printsyms
5829 @cindex symbol dump
5830 @kindex printsyms
5831 @cindex partial symbol dump
5832 Write a dump of debugging symbol data into the file @var{filename}.
5833 These commands are used to debug the _GDBN__ symbol-reading code. Only
5834 symbols with debugging data are included. If you use @code{printsyms},
5835 _GDBN__ includes all the symbols for which it has already collected full
5836 details: that is, @var{filename} reflects symbols for only those files
5837 whose symbols _GDBN__ has read. You can use the command @code{info
5838 sources} to find out which files these are. If you use
5839 @code{printpsyms} instead, the dump shows information about symbols that
5840 _GDBN__ only knows partially---that is, symbols defined in files that
5841 _GDBN__ has skimmed, but not yet read completely. Finally,
5842 @code{printmsyms} dumps just the minimal symbol information required for
5843 each object file from which _GDBN__ has read some symbols. The description of
5844 @code{symbol-file} explains how _GDBN__ reads symbols; both @code{info
5845 source} and @code{symbol-file} are described in @ref{Files, ,Commands
5846 to Specify Files}.
5847 @end ignore
5848 @end table
5849
5850 @node Altering, _GDBN__ Files, Symbols, Top
5851 @chapter Altering Execution
5852
5853 Once you think you have found an error in your program, you might want to
5854 find out for certain whether correcting the apparent error would lead to
5855 correct results in the rest of the run. You can find the answer by
5856 experiment, using the _GDBN__ features for altering execution of the
5857 program.
5858
5859 For example, you can store new values into variables or memory
5860 locations, give your program a signal, restart it at a different address,
5861 or even return prematurely from a function to its caller.
5862
5863 @menu
5864 * Assignment:: Assignment to Variables
5865 * Jumping:: Continuing at a Different Address
5866 * Signaling:: Giving your program a Signal
5867 * Returning:: Returning from a Function
5868 * Calling:: Calling your Program's Functions
5869 * Patching:: Patching your Program
5870 @end menu
5871
5872 @node Assignment, Jumping, Altering, Altering
5873 @section Assignment to Variables
5874
5875 @cindex assignment
5876 @cindex setting variables
5877 To alter the value of a variable, evaluate an assignment expression.
5878 @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}. For example,
5879
5880 @example
5881 print x=4
5882 @end example
5883
5884 @noindent
5885 stores the value 4 into the variable @code{x}, and then prints the
5886 value of the assignment expression (which is 4). @xref{Languages,
5887 ,Using _GDBN__ with Different Languages}, for more information on
5888 operators in supported languages.
5889
5890 @kindex set variable
5891 @cindex variables, setting
5892 If you are not interested in seeing the value of the assignment, use the
5893 @code{set} command instead of the @code{print} command. @code{set} is
5894 really the same as @code{print} except that the expression's value is not
5895 printed and is not put in the value history (@pxref{Value History, ,Value History}). The
5896 expression is evaluated only for its effects.
5897
5898 If the beginning of the argument string of the @code{set} command
5899 appears identical to a @code{set} subcommand, use the @code{set
5900 variable} command instead of just @code{set}. This command is identical
5901 to @code{set} except for its lack of subcommands. For example, a
5902 program might well have a variable @code{width}---which leads to
5903 an error if we try to set a new value with just @samp{set width=13}, as
5904 we might if @code{set width} did not happen to be a _GDBN__ command:
5905
5906 @example
5907 (_GDBP__) whatis width
5908 type = double
5909 (_GDBP__) p width
5910 $4 = 13
5911 (_GDBP__) set width=47
5912 Invalid syntax in expression.
5913 @end example
5914
5915 @noindent
5916 The invalid expression, of course, is @samp{=47}. What we can do in
5917 order to actually set our program's variable @code{width} is
5918
5919 @example
5920 (_GDBP__) set var width=47
5921 @end example
5922
5923 _GDBN__ allows more implicit conversions in assignments than C; you can
5924 freely store an integer value into a pointer variable or vice versa,
5925 and any structure can be converted to any other structure that is the
5926 same length or shorter.
5927 @comment FIXME: how do structs align/pad in these conversions?
5928 @comment /pesch@cygnus.com 18dec1990
5929
5930 To store values into arbitrary places in memory, use the @samp{@{@dots{}@}}
5931 construct to generate a value of specified type at a specified address
5932 (@pxref{Expressions, ,Expressions}). For example, @code{@{int@}0x83040} refers
5933 to memory location @code{0x83040} as an integer (which implies a certain size
5934 and representation in memory), and
5935
5936 @example
5937 set @{int@}0x83040 = 4
5938 @end example
5939
5940 @noindent
5941 stores the value 4 into that memory location.
5942
5943 @node Jumping, Signaling, Assignment, Altering
5944 @section Continuing at a Different Address
5945
5946 Ordinarily, when you continue your program, you do so at the place where
5947 it stopped, with the @code{continue} command. You can instead continue at
5948 an address of your own choosing, with the following commands:
5949
5950 @table @code
5951 @item jump @var{linespec}
5952 @kindex jump
5953 Resume execution at line @var{linespec}. Execution will stop
5954 immediately if there is a breakpoint there. @xref{List, ,Printing
5955 Source Lines}, for a description of the different forms of
5956 @var{linespec}.
5957
5958 The @code{jump} command does not change the current stack frame, or
5959 the stack pointer, or the contents of any memory location or any
5960 register other than the program counter. If line @var{linespec} is in
5961 a different function from the one currently executing, the results may
5962 be bizarre if the two functions expect different patterns of arguments or
5963 of local variables. For this reason, the @code{jump} command requests
5964 confirmation if the specified line is not in the function currently
5965 executing. However, even bizarre results are predictable if you are
5966 well acquainted with the machine-language code of your program.
5967
5968 @item jump *@var{address}
5969 Resume execution at the instruction at address @var{address}.
5970 @end table
5971
5972 You can get much the same effect as the @code{jump} command by storing a
5973 new value into the register @code{$pc}. The difference is that this
5974 does not start your program running; it only changes the address where it
5975 @emph{will} run when it is continued. For example,
5976
5977 @example
5978 set $pc = 0x485
5979 @end example
5980
5981 @noindent
5982 causes the next @code{continue} command or stepping command to execute at
5983 address @code{0x485}, rather than at the address where your program stopped.
5984 @xref{Continuing and Stepping, ,Continuing and Stepping}.
5985
5986 The most common occasion to use the @code{jump} command is to back up,
5987 perhaps with more breakpoints set, over a portion of a program that has
5988 already executed, in order to examine its execution in more detail.
5989
5990 @node Signaling, Returning, Jumping, Altering
5991 @c @group
5992 @section Giving your program a Signal
5993
5994 @table @code
5995 @item signal @var{signalnum}
5996 @kindex signal
5997 Resume execution where your program stopped, but give it immediately the
5998 signal number @var{signalnum}.
5999
6000 Alternatively, if @var{signalnum} is zero, continue execution without
6001 giving a signal. This is useful when your program stopped on account of
6002 a signal and would ordinary see the signal when resumed with the
6003 @code{continue} command; @samp{signal 0} causes it to resume without a
6004 signal.
6005
6006 @code{signal} does not repeat when you press @key{RET} a second time
6007 after executing the command.
6008 @end table
6009 @c @end group
6010
6011 @node Returning, Calling, Signaling, Altering
6012 @section Returning from a Function
6013
6014 @table @code
6015 @item return
6016 @itemx return @var{expression}
6017 @cindex returning from a function
6018 @kindex return
6019 You can cancel execution of a function call with the @code{return}
6020 command. If you give an
6021 @var{expression} argument, its value is used as the function's return
6022 value.
6023 @end table
6024
6025 When you use @code{return}, _GDBN__ discards the selected stack frame
6026 (and all frames within it). You can think of this as making the
6027 discarded frame return prematurely. If you wish to specify a value to
6028 be returned, give that value as the argument to @code{return}.
6029
6030 This pops the selected stack frame (@pxref{Selection, ,Selecting a
6031 Frame}), and any other frames inside of it, leaving its caller as the
6032 innermost remaining frame. That frame becomes selected. The
6033 specified value is stored in the registers used for returning values
6034 of functions.
6035
6036 The @code{return} command does not resume execution; it leaves the
6037 program stopped in the state that would exist if the function had just
6038 returned. In contrast, the @code{finish} command (@pxref{Continuing
6039 and Stepping, ,Continuing and Stepping}) resumes execution until the
6040 selected stack frame returns naturally.
6041
6042 @node Calling, Patching, Returning, Altering
6043 @section Calling your Program's Functions
6044
6045 @cindex calling functions
6046 @kindex call
6047 @table @code
6048 @item call @var{expr}
6049 Evaluate the expression @var{expr} without displaying @code{void}
6050 returned values.
6051 @end table
6052
6053 You can use this variant of the @code{print} command if you want to
6054 execute a function from your program, but without cluttering the output
6055 with @code{void} returned values. The result is printed and saved in
6056 the value history, if it is not void.
6057
6058 @node Patching, , Calling, Altering
6059 @section Patching your Program
6060 @cindex patching binaries
6061 @cindex writing into executables
6062 @cindex writing into corefiles
6063
6064 By default, _GDBN__ opens the file containing your program's executable
6065 code (or the corefile) read-only. This prevents accidental alterations
6066 to machine code; but it also prevents you from intentionally patching
6067 your program's binary.
6068
6069 If you'd like to be able to patch the binary, you can specify that
6070 explicitly with the @code{set write} command. For example, you might
6071 want to turn on internal debugging flags, or even to make emergency
6072 repairs.
6073
6074 @table @code
6075 @item set write on
6076 @itemx set write off
6077 @kindex set write
6078 If you specify @samp{set write on}, _GDBN__ will open executable and
6079 core files for both reading and writing; if you specify @samp{set write
6080 off} (the default), _GDBN__ will open them read-only.
6081
6082 If you have already loaded a file, you must load it
6083 again (using the @code{exec-file} or @code{core-file} command) after
6084 changing @code{set write}, for your new setting to take effect.
6085
6086 @item show write
6087 @kindex show write
6088 Display whether executable files and core files will be opened for
6089 writing as well as reading.
6090 @end table
6091
6092 @node _GDBN__ Files, Targets, Altering, Top
6093 @chapter _GDBN__'s Files
6094
6095 _GDBN__ needs to know the file name of the program to be debugged, both in
6096 order to read its symbol table and in order to start your program. To
6097 debug a core dump of a previous run, _GDBN__ must be told the file name of
6098 the core dump.
6099
6100 @menu
6101 * Files:: Commands to Specify Files
6102 * Symbol Errors:: Errors Reading Symbol Files
6103 @end menu
6104
6105 @node Files, Symbol Errors, _GDBN__ Files, _GDBN__ Files
6106 @section Commands to Specify Files
6107 @cindex core dump file
6108 @cindex symbol table
6109
6110 The usual way to specify executable and core dump file names is with
6111 the command arguments given when you start _GDBN__, (@pxref{Invocation,
6112 ,Getting In and Out of _GDBN__}.
6113
6114 Occasionally it is necessary to change to a different file during a
6115 _GDBN__ session. Or you may run _GDBN__ and forget to specify the files you
6116 want to use. In these situations the _GDBN__ commands to specify new files
6117 are useful.
6118
6119 @table @code
6120 @item file @var{filename}
6121 @cindex executable file
6122 @kindex file
6123 Use @var{filename} as the program to be debugged. It is read for its
6124 symbols and for the contents of pure memory. It is also the program
6125 executed when you use the @code{run} command. If you do not specify a
6126 directory and the file is not found in _GDBN__'s working directory, _GDBN__
6127 uses the environment variable @code{PATH} as a list of directories to
6128 search, just as the shell does when looking for a program to run. You
6129 can change the value of this variable, for both _GDBN__ and your program,
6130 using the @code{path} command.
6131
6132 On systems with memory-mapped files, an auxiliary symbol table file
6133 @file{@var{filename}.syms} may be available for @var{filename}. If it
6134 is, _GDBN__ will map in the symbol table from
6135 @file{@var{filename}.syms}, starting up more quickly. See the
6136 descriptions of the options @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow} (available
6137 on the command line, and with the commands @code{file}, @code{symbol-file},
6138 or @code{add-symbol-file}), for more information.
6139
6140 @item file
6141 @code{file} with no argument makes _GDBN__ discard any information it
6142 has on both executable file and the symbol table.
6143
6144 @item exec-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6145 @kindex exec-file
6146 Specify that the program to be run (but not the symbol table) is found
6147 in @var{filename}. _GDBN__ will search the environment variable @code{PATH}
6148 if necessary to locate your program. Omitting @var{filename} means to
6149 discard information on the executable file.
6150
6151 @item symbol-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6152 @kindex symbol-file
6153 Read symbol table information from file @var{filename}. @code{PATH} is
6154 searched when necessary. Use the @code{file} command to get both symbol
6155 table and program to run from the same file.
6156
6157 @code{symbol-file} with no argument clears out _GDBN__'s information on your
6158 program's symbol table.
6159
6160 The @code{symbol-file} command causes _GDBN__ to forget the contents of its
6161 convenience variables, the value history, and all breakpoints and
6162 auto-display expressions. This is because they may contain pointers to
6163 the internal data recording symbols and data types, which are part of
6164 the old symbol table data being discarded inside _GDBN__.
6165
6166 @code{symbol-file} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after
6167 executing it once.
6168
6169 When _GDBN__ is configured for a particular environment, it will
6170 understand debugging information in whatever format is the standard
6171 generated for that environment; you may use either a GNU compiler, or
6172 other compilers that adhere to the local conventions. Best results are
6173 usually obtained from GNU compilers; for example, using @code{_GCC__}
6174 you can generate debugging information for optimized code.
6175
6176 On some kinds of object files, the @code{symbol-file} command does not
6177 normally read the symbol table in full right away. Instead, it scans
6178 the symbol table quickly to find which source files and which symbols
6179 are present. The details are read later, one source file at a time,
6180 as they are needed.
6181
6182 The purpose of this two-stage reading strategy is to make _GDBN__ start up
6183 faster. For the most part, it is invisible except for occasional
6184 pauses while the symbol table details for a particular source file are
6185 being read. (The @code{set verbose} command can turn these pauses
6186 into messages if desired. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional Warnings
6187 and Messages}.)
6188
6189 When the symbol table is stored in COFF format, @code{symbol-file} does
6190 read the symbol table data in full right away. We have not implemented
6191 the two-stage strategy for COFF yet.
6192
6193 @item symbol-file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6194 @itemx file @var{filename} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6195 @kindex readnow
6196 @cindex reading symbols immediately
6197 @cindex symbols, reading immediately
6198 @kindex mapped
6199 @cindex memory-mapped symbol file
6200 @cindex saving symbol table
6201 You can override the _GDBN__ two-stage strategy for reading symbol
6202 tables by using the @samp{-readnow} option with any of the commands that
6203 load symbol table information, if you want to be sure _GDBN__ has the
6204 entire symbol table available.
6205
6206 If memory-mapped files are available on your system through the
6207 @code{mmap} system call, you can use another option, @samp{-mapped}, to
6208 cause _GDBN__ to write the symbols for your program into a reusable
6209 file. Future _GDBN__ debugging sessions will map in symbol information
6210 from this auxiliary symbol file (if the program hasn't changed), rather
6211 than spending time reading the symbol table from the executable
6212 program. Using the @samp{-mapped} option has the same effect as
6213 starting _GDBN__ with the @samp{-mapped} command-line option.
6214
6215 You can use both options together, to make sure the auxiliary symbol
6216 file has all the symbol information for your program.
6217
6218 The @code{.syms} file is specific to the host machine on which GDB is run.
6219 It holds an exact image of GDB's internal symbol table. It cannot be
6220 shared across multiple host platforms.
6221
6222 The auxiliary symbol file for a program called @var{myprog} is called
6223 @samp{@var{myprog}.syms}. Once this file exists (so long as it is newer
6224 than the corresponding executable), _GDBN__ will always attempt to use
6225 it when you debug @var{myprog}; no special options or commands are
6226 needed.
6227 @c FIXME: for now no mention of directories, since this seems to be in
6228 @c flux. 13mar1992 status is that in theory GDB would look either in
6229 @c current dir or in same dir as myprog; but issues like competing
6230 @c GDB's, or clutter in system dirs, mean that in practice right now
6231 @c only current dir is used. FFish says maybe a special GDB hierarchy
6232 @c (eg rooted in val of env var GDBSYMS) could exist for mappable symbol
6233 @c files.
6234
6235 @item core-file @r{[} @var{filename} @r{]}
6236 @kindex core
6237 @kindex core-file
6238 Specify the whereabouts of a core dump file to be used as the ``contents
6239 of memory''. Traditionally, core files contain only some parts of the
6240 address space of the process that generated them; _GDBN__ can access the
6241 executable file itself for other parts.
6242
6243 @code{core-file} with no argument specifies that no core file is
6244 to be used.
6245
6246 Note that the core file is ignored when your program is actually running
6247 under _GDBN__. So, if you have been running your program and you wish to
6248 debug a core file instead, you must kill the subprocess in which the
6249 program is running. To do this, use the @code{kill} command
6250 (@pxref{Kill Process, ,Killing the Child Process}).
6251
6252 @item load @var{filename}
6253 @kindex load
6254 _if__(_GENERIC__)
6255 Depending on what remote debugging facilities are configured into
6256 _GDBN__, the @code{load} command may be available. Where it exists, it
6257 is meant to make @var{filename} (an executable) available for debugging
6258 on the remote system---by downloading, or dynamic linking, for example.
6259 @code{load} also records @var{filename}'s symbol table in _GDBN__, like
6260 the @code{add-symbol-file} command.
6261
6262 If @code{load} is not available on your _GDBN__, attempting to execute
6263 it gets the error message ``@code{You can't do that when your target is
6264 @dots{}}''
6265 _fi__(_GENERIC__)
6266
6267 _if__(_VXWORKS__)
6268 On VxWorks, @code{load} will dynamically link @var{filename} on the
6269 current target system as well as adding its symbols in _GDBN__.
6270 _fi__(_VXWORKS__)
6271
6272 _if__(_I960__)
6273 @cindex download to Nindy-960
6274 With the Nindy interface to an Intel 960 board, @code{load} will
6275 download @var{filename} to the 960 as well as adding its symbols in
6276 _GDBN__.
6277 _fi__(_I960__)
6278
6279 _if__(_H8__)
6280 @cindex download to H8/300
6281 @cindex H8/300 download
6282 When you select remote debugging to a Hitachi H8/300 board (@pxref{Hitachi
6283 H8/300 Remote,,_GDBN__ and the Hitachi H8/300}), the
6284 @code{load} command downloads your program to the H8/300 and also opens
6285 it as the current executable target for _GDBN__ on your host (like the
6286 @code{file} command).
6287 _fi__(_H8__)
6288
6289 @code{load} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again after using it.
6290
6291 @item add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address}
6292 @itemx add-symbol-file @var{filename} @var{address} @r{[} -readnow @r{]} @r{[} -mapped @r{]}
6293 @kindex add-symbol-file
6294 @cindex dynamic linking
6295 The @code{add-symbol-file} command reads additional symbol table information
6296 from the file @var{filename}. You would use this command when @var{filename}
6297 has been dynamically loaded (by some other means) into the program that
6298 is running. @var{address} should be the memory address at which the
6299 file has been loaded; _GDBN__ cannot figure this out for itself.
6300
6301 The symbol table of the file @var{filename} is added to the symbol table
6302 originally read with the @code{symbol-file} command. You can use the
6303 @code{add-symbol-file} command any number of times; the new symbol data thus
6304 read keeps adding to the old. To discard all old symbol data instead,
6305 use the @code{symbol-file} command.
6306
6307 @code{add-symbol-file} will not repeat if you press @key{RET} after using it.
6308
6309 You can use the @samp{-mapped} and @samp{-readnow} options just as with
6310 the @code{symbol-file} command, to change how _GDBN__ manages the symbol
6311 tabl einformation for @var{filename}.
6312
6313 @item info files
6314 @itemx info target
6315 @kindex info files
6316 @kindex info target
6317 @code{info files} and @code{info target} are synonymous; both print
6318 the current targets (@pxref{Targets, ,Specifying a Debugging Target}),
6319 including the names of the executable and core dump files currently in
6320 use by _GDBN__, and the files from which symbols were loaded. The command
6321 @code{help targets} lists all possible targets rather than current
6322 ones.
6323
6324 @end table
6325
6326 All file-specifying commands allow both absolute and relative file names
6327 as arguments. _GDBN__ always converts the file name to an absolute path
6328 name and remembers it that way.
6329
6330 @cindex shared libraries
6331
6332 _GDBN__ supports SunOS, SVR4, and IBM RS/6000 shared libraries.
6333 _GDBN__ automatically loads symbol definitions from shared libraries
6334 when you use the @code{run} command, or when you examine a core file.
6335 (Before you issue the @code{run} command, _GDBN__ will not understand
6336 references to a function in a shared library, however---unless you are
6337 debugging a core file).
6338 @c FIXME: next _GDBN__ release should permit some refs to undef
6339 @c FIXME...symbols---eg in a break cmd---assuming they are from a shared lib
6340
6341 @table @code
6342 @item info share
6343 @itemx info sharedlibrary
6344 @kindex info sharedlibrary
6345 @kindex info share
6346 Print the names of the shared libraries which are currently loaded.
6347
6348 @item sharedlibrary @var{regex}
6349 @itemx share @var{regex}
6350 @kindex sharedlibrary
6351 @kindex share
6352 This is an obsolescent command; you can use it to explicitly
6353 load shared object library symbols for files matching a UNIX regular
6354 expression, but as with files loaded automatically, it will only load
6355 shared libraries required by your program for a core file or after
6356 typing @code{run}. If @var{regex} is omitted all shared libraries
6357 required by your program are loaded.
6358 @end table
6359
6360 @node Symbol Errors, , Files, _GDBN__ Files
6361 @section Errors Reading Symbol Files
6362
6363 While reading a symbol file, _GDBN__ will occasionally encounter problems,
6364 such as symbol types it does not recognize, or known bugs in compiler
6365 output. By default, _GDBN__ does not notify you of such problems, since
6366 they are relatively common and primarily of interest to people
6367 debugging compilers. If you are interested in seeing information
6368 about ill-constructed symbol tables, you can either ask _GDBN__ to print
6369 only one message about each such type of problem, no matter how many
6370 times the problem occurs; or you can ask _GDBN__ to print more messages,
6371 to see how many times the problems occur, with the @code{set
6372 complaints} command (@pxref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional Warnings and
6373 Messages}).
6374
6375 The messages currently printed, and their meanings, are:
6376
6377 @table @code
6378 @item inner block not inside outer block in @var{symbol}
6379
6380 The symbol information shows where symbol scopes begin and end
6381 (such as at the start of a function or a block of statements). This
6382 error indicates that an inner scope block is not fully contained
6383 in its outer scope blocks.
6384
6385 _GDBN__ circumvents the problem by treating the inner block as if it had
6386 the same scope as the outer block. In the error message, @var{symbol}
6387 may be shown as ``@code{(don't know)}'' if the outer block is not a
6388 function.
6389
6390 @item block at @var{address} out of order
6391
6392 The symbol information for symbol scope blocks should occur in
6393 order of increasing addresses. This error indicates that it does not
6394 do so.
6395
6396 _GDBN__ does not circumvent this problem, and will have trouble locating
6397 symbols in the source file whose symbols being read. (You can often
6398 determine what source file is affected by specifying @code{set verbose
6399 on}. @xref{Messages/Warnings, ,Optional Warnings and Messages}.)
6400
6401 @item bad block start address patched
6402
6403 The symbol information for a symbol scope block has a start address
6404 smaller than the address of the preceding source line. This is known
6405 to occur in the SunOS 4.1.1 (and earlier) C compiler.
6406
6407 _GDBN__ circumvents the problem by treating the symbol scope block as
6408 starting on the previous source line.
6409
6410 @item bad string table offset in symbol @var{n}
6411
6412 @cindex foo
6413 Symbol number @var{n} contains a pointer into the string table which is
6414 larger than the size of the string table.
6415
6416 _GDBN__ circumvents the problem by considering the symbol to have the
6417 name @code{foo}, which may cause other problems if many symbols end up
6418 with this name.
6419
6420 @item unknown symbol type @code{0x@var{nn}}
6421
6422 The symbol information contains new data types that _GDBN__ does not yet
6423 know how to read. @code{0x@var{nn}} is the symbol type of the misunderstood
6424 information, in hexadecimal.
6425
6426 _GDBN__ circumvents the error by ignoring this symbol information. This
6427 will usually allow your program to be debugged, though certain symbols
6428 will not be accessible. If you encounter such a problem and feel like
6429 debugging it, you can debug @code{_GDBP__} with itself, breakpoint on
6430 @code{complain}, then go up to the function @code{read_dbx_symtab} and
6431 examine @code{*bufp} to see the symbol.
6432
6433 @item stub type has NULL name
6434 _GDBN__ could not find the full definition for a struct or class.
6435
6436 @item const/volatile indicator missing (ok if using g++ v1.x), got@dots{}
6437
6438 The symbol information for a C++ member function is missing some
6439 information that recent versions of the compiler should have output
6440 for it.
6441
6442 @item info mismatch between compiler and debugger
6443
6444 _GDBN__ could not parse a type specification output by the compiler.
6445 @end table
6446
6447 @node Targets, Controlling _GDBN__, _GDBN__ Files, Top
6448 @chapter Specifying a Debugging Target
6449 @cindex debugging target
6450 @kindex target
6451
6452 A @dfn{target} is the execution environment occupied by your program.
6453 Often, _GDBN__ runs in the same host environment as your program; in
6454 that case, the debugging target is specified as a side effect when you
6455 use the @code{file} or @code{core} commands. When you need more
6456 flexibility---for example, running _GDBN__ on a physically separate
6457 host, or controlling a standalone system over a serial port or a
6458 realtime system over a TCP/IP connection---you can use the @code{target}
6459 command to specify one of the target types configured for _GDBN__
6460 (@pxref{Target Commands, ,Commands for Managing Targets}).
6461
6462 @menu
6463 * Active Targets:: Active Targets
6464 * Target Commands:: Commands for Managing Targets
6465 * Remote:: Remote Debugging
6466 @end menu
6467
6468 @node Active Targets, Target Commands, Targets, Targets
6469 @section Active Targets
6470 @cindex stacking targets
6471 @cindex active targets
6472 @cindex multiple targets
6473
6474 There are three classes of targets: processes, core files, and
6475 executable files. _GDBN__ can work concurrently on up to three active
6476 targets, one in each class. This allows you to (for example) start a
6477 process and inspect its activity without abandoning your work on a core
6478 file.
6479
6480 If, for example, you execute @samp{gdb a.out}, then the executable file
6481 @code{a.out} is the only active target. If you designate a core file as
6482 well---presumably from a prior run that crashed and coredumped---then
6483 _GDBN__ has two active targets and will use them in tandem, looking
6484 first in the corefile target, then in the executable file, to satisfy
6485 requests for memory addresses. (Typically, these two classes of target
6486 are complementary, since core files contain only a program's
6487 read-write memory---variables and so on---plus machine status, while
6488 executable files contain only the program text and initialized data.)
6489
6490 When you type @code{run}, your executable file becomes an active process
6491 target as well. When a process target is active, all _GDBN__ commands
6492 requesting memory addresses refer to that target; addresses in an active
6493 core file or executable file target are obscured while the process
6494 target is active.
6495
6496 Use the @code{core-file} and @code{exec-file} commands to select a
6497 new core file or executable target (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to Specify
6498 Files}). To specify as a target a process that is already running, use
6499 the @code{attach} command (@pxref{Attach, ,Debugging an
6500 Already-Running Process}.).
6501
6502 @node Target Commands, Remote, Active Targets, Targets
6503 @section Commands for Managing Targets
6504
6505 @table @code
6506 @item target @var{type} @var{parameters}
6507 Connects the _GDBN__ host environment to a target machine or process. A
6508 target is typically a protocol for talking to debugging facilities. You
6509 use the argument @var{type} to specify the type or protocol of the
6510 target machine.
6511
6512 Further @var{parameters} are interpreted by the target protocol, but
6513 typically include things like device names or host names to connect
6514 with, process numbers, and baud rates.
6515
6516 The @code{target} command will not repeat if you press @key{RET} again
6517 after executing the command.
6518
6519 @item help target
6520 @kindex help target
6521 Displays the names of all targets available. To display targets
6522 currently selected, use either @code{info target} or @code{info files}
6523 (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to Specify Files}).
6524
6525 @item help target @var{name}
6526 Describe a particular target, including any parameters necessary to
6527 select it.
6528 @end table
6529
6530 Here are some common targets (available, or not, depending on the GDB
6531 configuration):
6532
6533 @table @code
6534 @item target exec @var{prog}
6535 @kindex target exec
6536 An executable file. @samp{target exec @var{prog}} is the same as
6537 @samp{exec-file @var{prog}}.
6538
6539 @item target core @var{filename}
6540 @kindex target core
6541 A core dump file. @samp{target core @var{filename}} is the same as
6542 @samp{core-file @var{filename}}.
6543
6544 @item target remote @var{dev}
6545 @kindex target remote
6546 Remote serial target in GDB-specific protocol. The argument @var{dev}
6547 specifies what serial device to use for the connection (e.g.
6548 @file{/dev/ttya}). @xref{Remote, ,Remote Debugging}.
6549
6550 _if__(_AMD29K__)
6551 @item target amd-eb @var{dev} @var{speed} @var{PROG}
6552 @kindex target amd-eb
6553 @cindex AMD EB29K
6554 Remote PC-resident AMD EB29K board, attached over serial lines.
6555 @var{dev} is the serial device, as for @code{target remote};
6556 @var{speed} allows you to specify the linespeed; and @var{PROG} is the
6557 name of the program to be debugged, as it appears to DOS on the PC.
6558 @xref{EB29K Remote, ,GDB with a Remote EB29K}.
6559
6560 _fi__(_AMD29K__)
6561 _if__(_H8__)
6562 @item target hms
6563 @kindex target hms
6564 A Hitachi H8/300 board, attached via serial line to your host. Use
6565 special commands @code{device} and @code{speed} to control the serial
6566 line and the communications speed used. @xref{Hitachi H8/300
6567 Remote,,_GDBN__ and the Hitachi H8/300}.
6568
6569 _fi__(_H8__)
6570 _if__(_I960__)
6571 @item target nindy @var{devicename}
6572 @kindex target nindy
6573 An Intel 960 board controlled by a Nindy Monitor. @var{devicename} is
6574 the name of the serial device to use for the connection, e.g.
6575 @file{/dev/ttya}. @xref{i960-Nindy Remote, ,_GDBN__ with a Remote i960 (Nindy)}.
6576
6577 _fi__(_I960__)
6578 _if__(_VXWORKS__)
6579 @item target vxworks @var{machinename}
6580 @kindex target vxworks
6581 A VxWorks system, attached via TCP/IP. The argument @var{machinename}
6582 is the target system's machine name or IP address.
6583 @xref{VxWorks Remote, ,_GDBN__ and VxWorks}.
6584 _fi__(_VXWORKS__)
6585 @end table
6586
6587 _if__(_GENERIC__)
6588 Different targets are available on different configurations of _GDBN__; your
6589 configuration may have more or fewer targets.
6590 _fi__(_GENERIC__)
6591
6592 @node Remote, , Target Commands, Targets
6593 @section Remote Debugging
6594 @cindex remote debugging
6595
6596 If you are trying to debug a program running on a machine that cannot run
6597 GDB in the usual way, it is often useful to use remote debugging. For
6598 example, you might use remote debugging on an operating system kernel, or on
6599 a small system which does not have a general purpose operating system
6600 powerful enough to run a full-featured debugger.
6601
6602 Some configurations of GDB have special serial or TCP/IP interfaces
6603 to make this work with particular debugging targets. In addition,
6604 GDB comes with a generic serial protocol (specific to GDB, but
6605 not specific to any particular target system) which you can use if you
6606 write the remote stubs---the code that will run on the remote system to
6607 communicate with GDB.
6608
6609 To use the GDB remote serial protocol, the program to be debugged on
6610 the remote machine needs to contain a debugging stub which talks to
6611 GDB over the serial line. Several working remote stubs are
6612 distributed with GDB; see the @file{README} file in the GDB
6613 distribution for more information.
6614
6615 For details of this communication protocol, see the comments in the
6616 GDB source file @file{remote.c}.
6617
6618 To start remote debugging, first run GDB and specify as an executable file
6619 the program that is running in the remote machine. This tells GDB how
6620 to find your program's symbols and the contents of its pure text. Then
6621 establish communication using the @code{target remote} command with a device
6622 name as an argument. For example:
6623
6624 @example
6625 target remote /dev/ttyb
6626 @end example
6627
6628 @noindent
6629 if the serial line is connected to the device named @file{/dev/ttyb}. This
6630 will stop the remote machine if it is not already stopped.
6631
6632 Now you can use all the usual commands to examine and change data and to
6633 step and continue the remote program.
6634
6635 To resume the remote program and stop debugging it, use the @code{detach}
6636 command.
6637
6638 @kindex set remotedebug
6639 @kindex show remotedebug
6640 @cindex packets, reporting on stdout
6641 @cindex serial connections, debugging
6642 If you have trouble with the serial connection, you can use the command
6643 @code{set remotedebug}. This makes _GDBN__ report on all packets sent
6644 back and forth across the serial line to the remote machine. The
6645 packet-debugging information is printed on the _GDBN__ standard output
6646 stream. @code{set remotedebug off} turns it off, and @code{show
6647 remotedebug} will show you its current state.
6648
6649 Other remote targets may be available in your
6650 configuration of GDB; use @code{help targets} to list them.
6651
6652 _if__(_GENERIC__)
6653 _dnl__ Text on starting up GDB in various specific cases; it goes up front
6654 _dnl__ in manuals configured for any of those particular situations, here
6655 _dnl__ otherwise.
6656 @menu
6657 _include__(gdbinv-m.m4)<>_dnl__
6658 @end menu
6659 _include__(gdbinv-s.m4)
6660 _fi__(_GENERIC__)
6661
6662 @node Controlling _GDBN__, Sequences, Targets, Top
6663 @chapter Controlling _GDBN__
6664
6665 You can alter many aspects of _GDBN__'s interaction with you by using
6666 the @code{set} command. For commands controlling how _GDBN__ displays
6667 data, @pxref{Print Settings, ,Print Settings}; other settings are described here.
6668
6669 @menu
6670 * Prompt:: Prompt
6671 * Editing:: Command Editing
6672 * History:: Command History
6673 * Screen Size:: Screen Size
6674 * Numbers:: Numbers
6675 * Messages/Warnings:: Optional Warnings and Messages
6676 @end menu
6677
6678 @node Prompt, Editing, Controlling _GDBN__, Controlling _GDBN__
6679 @section Prompt
6680 @cindex prompt
6681
6682 _GDBN__ indicates its readiness to read a command by printing a string
6683 called the @dfn{prompt}. This string is normally @samp{(_GDBP__)}. You
6684 can change the prompt string with the @code{set prompt} command. For
6685 instance, when debugging _GDBN__ with _GDBN__, it is useful to change
6686 the prompt in one of the _GDBN__<>s so that you can always tell which
6687 one you are talking to.
6688
6689 @table @code
6690 @item set prompt @var{newprompt}
6691 @kindex set prompt
6692 Directs _GDBN__ to use @var{newprompt} as its prompt string henceforth.
6693 @kindex show prompt
6694 @item show prompt
6695 Prints a line of the form: @samp{Gdb's prompt is: @var{your-prompt}}
6696 @end table
6697
6698 @node Editing, History, Prompt, Controlling _GDBN__
6699 @section Command Editing
6700 @cindex readline
6701 @cindex command line editing
6702
6703 _GDBN__ reads its input commands via the @dfn{readline} interface. This
6704 GNU library provides consistent behavior for programs which provide a
6705 command line interface to the user. Advantages are @code{emacs}-style
6706 or @code{vi}-style inline editing of commands, @code{csh}-like history
6707 substitution, and a storage and recall of command history across
6708 debugging sessions.
6709
6710 You may control the behavior of command line editing in _GDBN__ with the
6711 command @code{set}.
6712
6713 @table @code
6714 @kindex set editing
6715 @cindex editing
6716 @item set editing
6717 @itemx set editing on
6718 Enable command line editing (enabled by default).
6719
6720 @item set editing off
6721 Disable command line editing.
6722
6723 @kindex show editing
6724 @item show editing
6725 Show whether command line editing is enabled.
6726 @end table
6727
6728 @node History, Screen Size, Editing, Controlling _GDBN__
6729 @section Command History
6730
6731 @table @code
6732 @cindex history substitution
6733 @cindex history file
6734 @kindex set history filename
6735 @item set history filename @var{fname}
6736 Set the name of the _GDBN__ command history file to @var{fname}. This is
6737 the file from which _GDBN__ will read an initial command history
6738 list or to which it will write this list when it exits. This list is
6739 accessed through history expansion or through the history
6740 command editing characters listed below. This file defaults to the
6741 value of the environment variable @code{GDBHISTFILE}, or to
6742 @file{./.gdb_history} if this variable is not set.
6743
6744 @cindex history save
6745 @kindex set history save
6746 @item set history save
6747 @itemx set history save on
6748 Record command history in a file, whose name may be specified with the
6749 @code{set history filename} command. By default, this option is disabled.
6750
6751 @item set history save off
6752 Stop recording command history in a file.
6753
6754 @cindex history size
6755 @kindex set history size
6756 @item set history size @var{size}
6757 Set the number of commands which _GDBN__ will keep in its history list.
6758 This defaults to the value of the environment variable
6759 @code{HISTSIZE}, or to 256 if this variable is not set.
6760 @end table
6761
6762 @cindex history expansion
6763 History expansion assigns special meaning to the character @kbd{!}.
6764 @iftex
6765 @xref{Event Designators}.
6766 @end iftex
6767 Since @kbd{!} is also the logical not operator in C, history expansion
6768 is off by default. If you decide to enable history expansion with the
6769 @code{set history expansion on} command, you may sometimes need to
6770 follow @kbd{!} (when it is used as logical not, in an expression) with
6771 a space or a tab to prevent it from being expanded. The readline
6772 history facilities will not attempt substitution on the strings
6773 @kbd{!=} and @kbd{!(}, even when history expansion is enabled.
6774
6775 The commands to control history expansion are:
6776
6777 @table @code
6778
6779 @kindex set history expansion
6780 @item set history expansion on
6781 @itemx set history expansion
6782 Enable history expansion. History expansion is off by default.
6783
6784 @item set history expansion off
6785 Disable history expansion.
6786
6787 The readline code comes with more complete documentation of
6788 editing and history expansion features. Users unfamiliar with @code{emacs}
6789 or @code{vi} may wish to read it.
6790 @iftex
6791 @xref{Command Line Editing}.
6792 @end iftex
6793
6794 @c @group
6795 @kindex show history
6796 @item show history
6797 @itemx show history filename
6798 @itemx show history save
6799 @itemx show history size
6800 @itemx show history expansion
6801 These commands display the state of the _GDBN__ history parameters.
6802 @code{show history} by itself displays all four states.
6803 @c @end group
6804 @end table
6805
6806 @table @code
6807 @kindex show commands
6808 @item show commands
6809 Display the last ten commands in the command history.
6810
6811 @item show commands @var{n}
6812 Print ten commands centered on command number @var{n}.
6813
6814 @item show commands +
6815 Print ten commands just after the commands last printed.
6816 @end table
6817
6818 @node Screen Size, Numbers, History, Controlling _GDBN__
6819 @section Screen Size
6820 @cindex size of screen
6821 @cindex pauses in output
6822
6823 Certain commands to _GDBN__ may produce large amounts of information
6824 output to the screen. To help you read all of it, _GDBN__ pauses and
6825 asks you for input at the end of each page of output. Type @key{RET}
6826 when you want to continue the output. _GDBN__ also uses the screen
6827 width setting to determine when to wrap lines of output. Depending on
6828 what is being printed, it tries to break the line at a readable place,
6829 rather than simply letting it overflow onto the following line.
6830
6831 Normally _GDBN__ knows the size of the screen from the termcap data base
6832 together with the value of the @code{TERM} environment variable and the
6833 @code{stty rows} and @code{stty cols} settings. If this is not correct,
6834 you can override it with the @code{set height} and @code{set
6835 width} commands:
6836
6837 @table @code
6838 @item set height @var{lpp}
6839 @itemx show height
6840 @itemx set width @var{cpl}
6841 @itemx show width
6842 @kindex set height
6843 @kindex set width
6844 @kindex show width
6845 @kindex show height
6846 These @code{set} commands specify a screen height of @var{lpp} lines and
6847 a screen width of @var{cpl} characters. The associated @code{show}
6848 commands display the current settings.
6849
6850 If you specify a height of zero lines, _GDBN__ will not pause during output
6851 no matter how long the output is. This is useful if output is to a file
6852 or to an editor buffer.
6853 @end table
6854
6855 @node Numbers, Messages/Warnings, Screen Size, Controlling _GDBN__
6856 @section Numbers
6857 @cindex number representation
6858 @cindex entering numbers
6859
6860 You can always enter numbers in octal, decimal, or hexadecimal in _GDBN__ by
6861 the usual conventions: octal numbers begin with @samp{0}, decimal
6862 numbers end with @samp{.}, and hexadecimal numbers begin with @samp{0x}.
6863 Numbers that begin with none of these are, by default, entered in base
6864 10; likewise, the default display for numbers---when no particular
6865 format is specified---is base 10. You can change the default base for
6866 both input and output with the @code{set radix} command.
6867
6868 @table @code
6869 @kindex set radix
6870 @item set radix @var{base}
6871 Set the default base for numeric input and display. Supported choices
6872 for @var{base} are decimal 2, 8, 10, 16. @var{base} must itself be
6873 specified either unambiguously or using the current default radix; for
6874 example, any of
6875
6876 @example
6877 set radix 1010
6878 set radix 012
6879 set radix 10.
6880 set radix 0xa
6881 @end example
6882
6883 @noindent
6884 will set the base to decimal. On the other hand, @samp{set radix 10}
6885 will leave the radix unchanged no matter what it was.
6886
6887 @kindex show radix
6888 @item show radix
6889 Display the current default base for numeric input and display.
6890 @end table
6891
6892 @node Messages/Warnings, , Numbers, Controlling _GDBN__
6893 @section Optional Warnings and Messages
6894
6895 By default, _GDBN__ is silent about its inner workings. If you are running
6896 on a slow machine, you may want to use the @code{set verbose} command.
6897 It will make _GDBN__ tell you when it does a lengthy internal operation, so
6898 you will not think it has crashed.
6899
6900 Currently, the messages controlled by @code{set verbose} are those
6901 which announce that the symbol table for a source file is being read
6902 (@pxref{Files, ,Commands to Specify Files}, in the description of the
6903 command @code{symbol-file}).
6904 @c The following is the right way to do it, but emacs 18.55 does not support
6905 @c @ref, and neither the emacs lisp manual version of texinfmt or makeinfo
6906 @c is released.
6907 @ignore
6908 see @code{symbol-file} in @ref{Files, ,Commands to Specify Files}).
6909 @end ignore
6910
6911 @table @code
6912 @kindex set verbose
6913 @item set verbose on
6914 Enables _GDBN__'s output of certain informational messages.
6915
6916 @item set verbose off
6917 Disables _GDBN__'s output of certain informational messages.
6918
6919 @kindex show verbose
6920 @item show verbose
6921 Displays whether @code{set verbose} is on or off.
6922 @end table
6923
6924 By default, if _GDBN__ encounters bugs in the symbol table of an object
6925 file, it is silent; but if you are debugging a compiler, you may find
6926 this information useful (@pxref{Symbol Errors, ,Errors Reading Symbol Files}).
6927
6928 @table @code
6929 @kindex set complaints
6930 @item set complaints @var{limit}
6931 Permits _GDBN__ to output @var{limit} complaints about each type of unusual
6932 symbols before becoming silent about the problem. Set @var{limit} to
6933 zero to suppress all complaints; set it to a large number to prevent
6934 complaints from being suppressed.
6935
6936 @kindex show complaints
6937 @item show complaints
6938 Displays how many symbol complaints _GDBN__ is permitted to produce.
6939 @end table
6940
6941 By default, _GDBN__ is cautious, and asks what sometimes seem to be a
6942 lot of stupid questions to confirm certain commands. For example, if
6943 you try to run a program which is already running:
6944
6945 @example
6946 (_GDBP__) run
6947 The program being debugged has been started already.
6948 Start it from the beginning? (y or n)
6949 @end example
6950
6951 If you are willing to unflinchingly face the consequences of your own
6952 commands, you can disable this ``feature'':
6953
6954 @table @code
6955 @kindex set confirm
6956 @cindex flinching
6957 @cindex confirmation
6958 @cindex stupid questions
6959 @item set confirm off
6960 Disables confirmation requests.
6961
6962 @item set confirm on
6963 Enables confirmation requests (the default).
6964
6965 @item show confirm
6966 @kindex show confirm
6967 Displays state of confirmation requests.
6968 @end table
6969
6970 @c FIXME this does not really belong here. But where *does* it belong?
6971 @cindex reloading symbols
6972 Some systems allow individual object files that make up your program to
6973 be replaced without stopping and restarting your program.
6974 _if__(_VXWORKS__)
6975 For example, in VxWorks you can simply recompile a defective object file
6976 and keep on running.
6977 _fi__(_VXWORKS__)
6978 If you are running on one of these systems, you can allow _GDBN__ to
6979 reload the symbols for automatically relinked modules:
6980
6981 @table @code
6982 @kindex set symbol-reloading
6983 @item set symbol-reloading on
6984 Replace symbol definitions for the corresponding source file when an
6985 object file with a particular name is seen again.
6986
6987 @item set symbol-reloading off
6988 Do not replace symbol definitions when re-encountering object files of
6989 the same name. This is the default state; if you are not running on a
6990 system that permits automatically relinking modules, you should leave
6991 @code{symbol-reloading} off, since otherwise _GDBN__ may discard symbols
6992 when linking large programs, that may contain several modules (from
6993 different directories or libraries) with the same name.
6994
6995 @item show symbol-reloading
6996 Show the current @code{on} or @code{off} setting.
6997 @end table
6998
6999 @node Sequences, Emacs, Controlling _GDBN__, Top
7000 @chapter Canned Sequences of Commands
7001
7002 Aside from breakpoint commands (@pxref{Break Commands, ,Breakpoint
7003 Command Lists}), _GDBN__ provides two ways to store sequences of commands
7004 for execution as a unit: user-defined commands and command files.
7005
7006 @menu
7007 * Define:: User-Defined Commands
7008 * Command Files:: Command Files
7009 * Output:: Commands for Controlled Output
7010 @end menu
7011
7012 @node Define, Command Files, Sequences, Sequences
7013 @section User-Defined Commands
7014
7015 @cindex user-defined command
7016 A @dfn{user-defined command} is a sequence of _GDBN__ commands to which you
7017 assign a new name as a command. This is done with the @code{define}
7018 command.
7019
7020 @table @code
7021 @item define @var{commandname}
7022 @kindex define
7023 Define a command named @var{commandname}. If there is already a command
7024 by that name, you are asked to confirm that you want to redefine it.
7025
7026 The definition of the command is made up of other _GDBN__ command lines,
7027 which are given following the @code{define} command. The end of these
7028 commands is marked by a line containing @code{end}.
7029
7030 @item document @var{commandname}
7031 @kindex document
7032 Give documentation to the user-defined command @var{commandname}. The
7033 command @var{commandname} must already be defined. This command reads
7034 lines of documentation just as @code{define} reads the lines of the
7035 command definition, ending with @code{end}. After the @code{document}
7036 command is finished, @code{help} on command @var{commandname} will print
7037 the documentation you have specified.
7038
7039 You may use the @code{document} command again to change the
7040 documentation of a command. Redefining the command with @code{define}
7041 does not change the documentation.
7042
7043 @item help user-defined
7044 @kindex help user-defined
7045 List all user-defined commands, with the first line of the documentation
7046 (if any) for each.
7047
7048 @item show user
7049 @itemx show user @var{commandname}
7050 @kindex show user
7051 Display the _GDBN__ commands used to define @var{commandname} (but not its
7052 documentation). If no @var{commandname} is given, display the
7053 definitions for all user-defined commands.
7054 @end table
7055
7056 User-defined commands do not take arguments. When they are executed, the
7057 commands of the definition are not printed. An error in any command
7058 stops execution of the user-defined command.
7059
7060 Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
7061 without asking when used inside a user-defined command. Many _GDBN__ commands
7062 that normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
7063 when used in a user-defined command.
7064
7065 @node Command Files, Output, Define, Sequences
7066 @section Command Files
7067
7068 @cindex command files
7069 A command file for _GDBN__ is a file of lines that are _GDBN__ commands. Comments
7070 (lines starting with @kbd{#}) may also be included. An empty line in a
7071 command file does nothing; it does not mean to repeat the last command, as
7072 it would from the terminal.
7073
7074 @cindex init file
7075 @cindex @file{_GDBINIT__}
7076 When you start _GDBN__, it automatically executes commands from its
7077 @dfn{init files}. These are files named @file{_GDBINIT__}. _GDBN__ reads
7078 the init file (if any) in your home directory and then the init file
7079 (if any) in the current working directory. (The init files are not
7080 executed if you use the @samp{-nx} option; @pxref{Mode Options,
7081 ,Choosing Modes}.) You can also request the execution of a command
7082 file with the @code{source} command:
7083
7084 @table @code
7085 @item source @var{filename}
7086 @kindex source
7087 Execute the command file @var{filename}.
7088 @end table
7089
7090 The lines in a command file are executed sequentially. They are not
7091 printed as they are executed. An error in any command terminates execution
7092 of the command file.
7093
7094 Commands that would ask for confirmation if used interactively proceed
7095 without asking when used in a command file. Many _GDBN__ commands that
7096 normally print messages to say what they are doing omit the messages
7097 when called from command files.
7098
7099 @node Output, , Command Files, Sequences
7100 @section Commands for Controlled Output
7101
7102 During the execution of a command file or a user-defined command, normal
7103 _GDBN__ output is suppressed; the only output that appears is what is
7104 explicitly printed by the commands in the definition. This section
7105 describes three commands useful for generating exactly the output you
7106 want.
7107
7108 @table @code
7109 @item echo @var{text}
7110 @kindex echo
7111 @c I do not consider backslash-space a standard C escape sequence
7112 @c because it is not in ANSI.
7113 Print @var{text}. Nonprinting characters can be included in
7114 @var{text} using C escape sequences, such as @samp{\n} to print a
7115 newline. @strong{No newline will be printed unless you specify one.}
7116 In addition to the standard C escape sequences, a backslash followed
7117 by a space stands for a space. This is useful for outputting a
7118 string with spaces at the beginning or the end, since leading and
7119 trailing spaces are otherwise trimmed from all arguments.
7120 To print @samp{@w{ }and foo =@w{ }}, use the command
7121 @samp{echo \@w{ }and foo = \@w{ }}.
7122
7123 A backslash at the end of @var{text} can be used, as in C, to continue
7124 the command onto subsequent lines. For example,
7125
7126 @example
7127 echo This is some text\n\
7128 which is continued\n\
7129 onto several lines.\n
7130 @end example
7131
7132 produces the same output as
7133
7134 @example
7135 echo This is some text\n
7136 echo which is continued\n
7137 echo onto several lines.\n
7138 @end example
7139
7140 @item output @var{expression}
7141 @kindex output
7142 Print the value of @var{expression} and nothing but that value: no
7143 newlines, no @samp{$@var{nn} = }. The value is not entered in the
7144 value history either. @xref{Expressions, ,Expressions}, for more information on
7145 expressions.
7146
7147 @item output/@var{fmt} @var{expression}
7148 Print the value of @var{expression} in format @var{fmt}. You can use
7149 the same formats as for @code{print}; @pxref{Output formats}, for more
7150 information.
7151
7152 @item printf @var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{}
7153 @kindex printf
7154 Print the values of the @var{expressions} under the control of
7155 @var{string}. The @var{expressions} are separated by commas and may
7156 be either numbers or pointers. Their values are printed as specified
7157 by @var{string}, exactly as if your program were to execute
7158
7159 @example
7160 printf (@var{string}, @var{expressions}@dots{});
7161 @end example
7162
7163 For example, you can print two values in hex like this:
7164
7165 @smallexample
7166 printf "foo, bar-foo = 0x%x, 0x%x\n", foo, bar-foo
7167 @end smallexample
7168
7169 The only backslash-escape sequences that you can use in the format
7170 string are the simple ones that consist of backslash followed by a
7171 letter.
7172 @end table
7173
7174 _if__(_LUCID__)
7175 @node Emacs, Energize, Sequences, Top
7176 _fi__(_LUCID__)
7177 _if__(!_LUCID__)
7178 @node Emacs, _GDBN__ Bugs, Sequences, Top
7179 _fi__(!_LUCID__)
7180 @chapter Using _GDBN__ under GNU Emacs
7181
7182 @cindex emacs
7183 A special interface allows you to use GNU Emacs to view (and
7184 edit) the source files for the program you are debugging with
7185 _GDBN__.
7186
7187 To use this interface, use the command @kbd{M-x gdb} in Emacs. Give the
7188 executable file you want to debug as an argument. This command starts
7189 _GDBN__ as a subprocess of Emacs, with input and output through a newly
7190 created Emacs buffer.
7191
7192 Using _GDBN__ under Emacs is just like using _GDBN__ normally except for two
7193 things:
7194
7195 @itemize @bullet
7196 @item
7197 All ``terminal'' input and output goes through the Emacs buffer.
7198 @end itemize
7199
7200 This applies both to _GDBN__ commands and their output, and to the input
7201 and output done by the program you are debugging.
7202
7203 This is useful because it means that you can copy the text of previous
7204 commands and input them again; you can even use parts of the output
7205 in this way.
7206
7207 All the facilities of Emacs' Shell mode are available for interacting
7208 with your program. In particular, you can send signals the usual
7209 way---for example, @kbd{C-c C-c} for an interrupt, @kbd{C-c C-z} for a
7210 stop.
7211
7212 @itemize @bullet
7213 @item
7214 _GDBN__ displays source code through Emacs.
7215 @end itemize
7216
7217 Each time _GDBN__ displays a stack frame, Emacs automatically finds the
7218 source file for that frame and puts an arrow (_0__@samp{=>}_1__) at the
7219 left margin of the current line. Emacs uses a separate buffer for
7220 source display, and splits the window to show both your _GDBN__ session
7221 and the source.
7222
7223 Explicit _GDBN__ @code{list} or search commands still produce output as
7224 usual, but you probably will have no reason to use them.
7225
7226 @quotation
7227 @emph{Warning:} If the directory where your program resides is not your
7228 current directory, it can be easy to confuse Emacs about the location of
7229 the source files, in which case the auxiliary display buffer will not
7230 appear to show your source. _GDBN__ can find programs by searching your
7231 environment's @code{PATH} variable, so the _GDBN__ input and output
7232 session will proceed normally; but Emacs does not get enough information
7233 back from _GDBN__ to locate the source files in this situation. To
7234 avoid this problem, either start _GDBN__ mode from the directory where
7235 your program resides, or specify a full path name when prompted for the
7236 @kbd{M-x gdb} argument.
7237
7238 A similar confusion can result if you use the _GDBN__ @code{file} command to
7239 switch to debugging a program in some other location, from an existing
7240 _GDBN__ buffer in Emacs.
7241 @end quotation
7242
7243 By default, @kbd{M-x gdb} calls the program called @file{gdb}. If
7244 you need to call _GDBN__ by a different name (for example, if you keep
7245 several configurations around, with different names) you can set the
7246 Emacs variable @code{gdb-command-name}; for example,
7247
7248 @example
7249 (setq gdb-command-name "mygdb")
7250 @end example
7251
7252 @noindent
7253 (preceded by @kbd{ESC ESC}, or typed in the @code{*scratch*} buffer, or
7254 in your @file{.emacs} file) will make Emacs call the program named
7255 ``@code{mygdb}'' instead.
7256
7257 In the _GDBN__ I/O buffer, you can use these special Emacs commands in
7258 addition to the standard Shell mode commands:
7259
7260 @table @kbd
7261 @item C-h m
7262 Describe the features of Emacs' _GDBN__ Mode.
7263
7264 @item M-s
7265 Execute to another source line, like the _GDBN__ @code{step} command; also
7266 update the display window to show the current file and location.
7267
7268 @item M-n
7269 Execute to next source line in this function, skipping all function
7270 calls, like the _GDBN__ @code{next} command. Then update the display window
7271 to show the current file and location.
7272
7273 @item M-i
7274 Execute one instruction, like the _GDBN__ @code{stepi} command; update
7275 display window accordingly.
7276
7277 @item M-x gdb-nexti
7278 Execute to next instruction, using the _GDBN__ @code{nexti} command; update
7279 display window accordingly.
7280
7281 @item C-c C-f
7282 Execute until exit from the selected stack frame, like the _GDBN__
7283 @code{finish} command.
7284
7285 @item M-c
7286 Continue execution of your program, like the _GDBN__ @code{continue}
7287 command.
7288
7289 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-p}.
7290
7291 @item M-u
7292 Go up the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument
7293 (@pxref{Arguments, , Numeric Arguments, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}),
7294 like the _GDBN__ @code{up} command.
7295
7296 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-u}.
7297
7298 @item M-d
7299 Go down the number of frames indicated by the numeric argument, like the
7300 _GDBN__ @code{down} command.
7301
7302 @emph{Warning:} In Emacs v19, this command is @kbd{C-c C-d}.
7303
7304 @item C-x &
7305 Read the number where the cursor is positioned, and insert it at the end
7306 of the _GDBN__ I/O buffer. For example, if you wish to disassemble code
7307 around an address that was displayed earlier, type @kbd{disassemble};
7308 then move the cursor to the address display, and pick up the
7309 argument for @code{disassemble} by typing @kbd{C-x &}.
7310
7311 You can customize this further on the fly by defining elements of the list
7312 @code{gdb-print-command}; once it is defined, you can format or
7313 otherwise process numbers picked up by @kbd{C-x &} before they are
7314 inserted. A numeric argument to @kbd{C-x &} will both indicate that you
7315 wish special formatting, and act as an index to pick an element of the
7316 list. If the list element is a string, the number to be inserted is
7317 formatted using the Emacs function @code{format}; otherwise the number
7318 is passed as an argument to the corresponding list element.
7319 @end table
7320
7321 In any source file, the Emacs command @kbd{C-x SPC} (@code{gdb-break})
7322 tells _GDBN__ to set a breakpoint on the source line point is on.
7323
7324 If you accidentally delete the source-display buffer, an easy way to get
7325 it back is to type the command @code{f} in the _GDBN__ buffer, to
7326 request a frame display; when you run under Emacs, this will recreate
7327 the source buffer if necessary to show you the context of the current
7328 frame.
7329
7330 The source files displayed in Emacs are in ordinary Emacs buffers
7331 which are visiting the source files in the usual way. You can edit
7332 the files with these buffers if you wish; but keep in mind that _GDBN__
7333 communicates with Emacs in terms of line numbers. If you add or
7334 delete lines from the text, the line numbers that _GDBN__ knows will cease
7335 to correspond properly to the code.
7336
7337 @c The following dropped because Epoch is nonstandard. Reactivate
7338 @c if/when v19 does something similar. ---pesch@cygnus.com 19dec1990
7339 @ignore
7340 @kindex emacs epoch environment
7341 @kindex epoch
7342 @kindex inspect
7343
7344 Version 18 of Emacs has a built-in window system called the @code{epoch}
7345 environment. Users of this environment can use a new command,
7346 @code{inspect} which performs identically to @code{print} except that
7347 each value is printed in its own window.
7348 @end ignore
7349
7350 _if__(_LUCID__)
7351 @node Energize, _GDBN__ Bugs, Emacs, Top
7352 @chapter Using _GDBN__ with Energize
7353
7354 @cindex Energize
7355 The Energize Programming System is an integrated development environment
7356 that includes a point-and-click interface to many programming tools.
7357 When you use _GDBN__ in this environment, you can use the standard
7358 Energize graphical interface to drive _GDBN__; you can also, if you
7359 choose, type _GDBN__ commands as usual in a debugging window. Even if
7360 you use the graphical interface, the debugging window (which uses Emacs,
7361 and resembles the standard Emacs interface to _GDBN__) displays the
7362 equivalent commands, so that the history of your debugging session is
7363 properly reflected.
7364
7365 When Energize starts up a _GDBN__ session, it uses one of the
7366 command-line options @samp{-energize} or @samp{-cadillac} (``cadillac''
7367 is the name of the communications protocol used by the Energize system).
7368 This option makes _GDBN__ run as one of the tools in the Energize Tool
7369 Set: it sends all output to the Energize kernel, and accept input from
7370 it as well.
7371
7372 See the user manual for the Energize Programming System for
7373 information on how to use the Energize graphical interface and the other
7374 development tools that Energize integrates with _GDBN__.
7375
7376 @node _GDBN__ Bugs, Renamed Commands, Energize, Top
7377 _fi__(_LUCID__)
7378 _if__(!_LUCID__)
7379 @node _GDBN__ Bugs, Renamed Commands, Emacs, Top
7380 _fi__(!_LUCID__)
7381 @chapter Reporting Bugs in _GDBN__
7382 @cindex Bugs in _GDBN__
7383 @cindex Reporting Bugs in _GDBN__
7384
7385 Your bug reports play an essential role in making _GDBN__ reliable.
7386
7387 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it
7388 may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help
7389 the entire community by making the next version of _GDBN__ work better. Bug
7390 reports are your contribution to the maintenance of _GDBN__.
7391
7392 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7393 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7394
7395 @menu
7396 * Bug Criteria:: Have You Found a Bug?
7397 * Bug Reporting:: How to Report Bugs
7398 @end menu
7399
7400 @node Bug Criteria, Bug Reporting, _GDBN__ Bugs, _GDBN__ Bugs
7401 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7402 @cindex Bug Criteria
7403
7404 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7405
7406 @itemize @bullet
7407 @item
7408 @cindex Fatal Signal
7409 @cindex Core Dump
7410 If the debugger gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7411 _GDBN__ bug. Reliable debuggers never crash.
7412
7413 @item
7414 @cindex error on Valid Input
7415 If _GDBN__ produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7416
7417 @item
7418 @cindex Invalid Input
7419 If _GDBN__ does not produce an error message for invalid input,
7420 that is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of
7421 ``invalid input'' might be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support
7422 for traditional practice''.
7423
7424 @item
7425 If you are an experienced user of debugging tools, your suggestions
7426 for improvement of _GDBN__ are welcome in any case.
7427 @end itemize
7428
7429 @node Bug Reporting, , Bug Criteria, _GDBN__ Bugs
7430 @section How to Report Bugs
7431 @cindex Bug Reports
7432 @cindex _GDBN__ Bugs, Reporting
7433
7434 A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
7435 If you obtained _GDBN__ from a support organization, we recommend you
7436 contact that organization first.
7437
7438 Contact information for many support companies and individuals is
7439 available in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the GNU Emacs distribution.
7440
7441 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for _GDBN__ to one
7442 of these addresses:
7443
7444 @example
7445 bug-gdb@@prep.ai.mit.edu
7446 @{ucbvax|mit-eddie|uunet@}!prep.ai.mit.edu!bug-gdb
7447 @end example
7448
7449 @strong{Do not send bug reports to @samp{info-gdb}, or to
7450 @samp{help-gdb}, or to any newsgroups.} Most users of _GDBN__ do not want to
7451 receive bug reports. Those that do, have arranged to receive @samp{bug-gdb}.
7452
7453 The mailing list @samp{bug-gdb} has a newsgroup @samp{gnu.gdb.bug} which
7454 serves as a repeater. The mailing list and the newsgroup carry exactly
7455 the same messages. Often people think of posting bug reports to the
7456 newsgroup instead of mailing them. This appears to work, but it has one
7457 problem which can be crucial: a newsgroup posting often lacks a mail
7458 path back to the sender. Thus, if we need to ask for more information,
7459 we may be unable to reach you. For this reason, it is better to send
7460 bug reports to the mailing list.
7461
7462 As a last resort, send bug reports on paper to:
7463
7464 @example
7465 GNU Debugger Bugs
7466 Free Software Foundation
7467 545 Tech Square
7468 Cambridge, MA 02139
7469 @end example
7470
7471 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7472 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7473 fact or leave it out, state it!
7474
7475 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7476 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
7477 assume that the name of the variable you use in an example does not matter.
7478 Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a
7479 stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where that
7480 name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the contents
7481 of that location would fool the debugger into doing the right thing despite
7482 the bug. Play it safe and give a specific, complete example. That is the
7483 easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
7484
7485 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7486 the bug if it is new to us. It is not as important as what happens if
7487 the bug is already known. Therefore, always write your bug reports on
7488 the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
7489
7490 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7491 bell?'' Those bug reports are useless, and we urge everyone to
7492 @emph{refuse to respond to them} except to chide the sender to report
7493 bugs properly.
7494
7495 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7496
7497 @itemize @bullet
7498 @item
7499 The version of _GDBN__. _GDBN__ announces it if you start with no
7500 arguments; you can also print it at any time using @code{show version}.
7501
7502 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7503 the bug in the current version of _GDBN__.
7504
7505 @item
7506 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7507 version number.
7508
7509 @item
7510 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile _GDBN__---e.g.
7511 ``_GCC__-2.0''.
7512
7513 @item
7514 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile the program you
7515 are debugging---e.g. ``_GCC__-2.0''.
7516
7517 @item
7518 The command arguments you gave the compiler to compile your example and
7519 observe the bug. For example, did you use @samp{-O}? To guarantee
7520 you will not omit something important, list them all. A copy of the
7521 Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7522
7523 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7524 and then we might not encounter the bug.
7525
7526 @item
7527 A complete input script, and all necessary source files, that will
7528 reproduce the bug.
7529
7530 @item
7531 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7532 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7533
7534 Of course, if the bug is that _GDBN__ gets a fatal signal, then we will
7535 certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7536 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. We are human, after all. You
7537 might as well not give us a chance to make a mistake.
7538
7539 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7540 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as,
7541 your copy of _GDBN__ is out of synch, or you have encountered a
7542 bug in the C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy
7543 might crash and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash,
7544 then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not
7545 happening for us. If you had not told us to expect a crash, then we
7546 would not be able to draw any conclusion from our observations.
7547
7548 @item
7549 If you wish to suggest changes to the _GDBN__ source, send us context
7550 diffs. If you even discuss something in the _GDBN__ source, refer to
7551 it by context, not by line number.
7552
7553 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7554 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7555 @end itemize
7556
7557 Here are some things that are not necessary:
7558
7559 @itemize @bullet
7560 @item
7561 A description of the envelope of the bug.
7562
7563 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7564 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7565 changes will not affect it.
7566
7567 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7568 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7569 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7570 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7571
7572 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7573 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7574 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7575 less time, etc.
7576
7577 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7578 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7579
7580 @item
7581 A patch for the bug.
7582
7583 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7584 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7585 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7586 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7587
7588 Sometimes with a program as complicated as _GDBN__ it is very hard to
7589 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7590 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able
7591 to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7592
7593 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7594 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7595 help us to understand.
7596
7597 @item
7598 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7599
7600 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7601 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7602 @end itemize
7603
7604 @c Note: no need to update nodes for rdl-apps.texi since it appears
7605 @c *only* in the TeX version of the manual.
7606 @c Note: eventually, make a cross reference to the readline Info nodes.
7607 @iftex
7608 @c appendices describing GNU readline. Distributed with readline code.
7609 @include rluser.texinfo
7610 @include inc-hist.texi
7611 @end iftex
7612
7613 @node Renamed Commands, Formatting Documentation, _GDBN__ Bugs, Top
7614 @appendix Renamed Commands
7615
7616 The following commands were renamed in GDB 4, in order to make the
7617 command set as a whole more consistent and easier to use and remember:
7618
7619 @kindex add-syms
7620 @kindex delete environment
7621 @kindex info copying
7622 @kindex info convenience
7623 @kindex info directories
7624 @kindex info editing
7625 @kindex info history
7626 @kindex info targets
7627 @kindex info values
7628 @kindex info version
7629 @kindex info warranty
7630 @kindex set addressprint
7631 @kindex set arrayprint
7632 @kindex set prettyprint
7633 @kindex set screen-height
7634 @kindex set screen-width
7635 @kindex set unionprint
7636 @kindex set vtblprint
7637 @kindex set demangle
7638 @kindex set asm-demangle
7639 @kindex set sevenbit-strings
7640 @kindex set array-max
7641 @kindex set caution
7642 @kindex set history write
7643 @kindex show addressprint
7644 @kindex show arrayprint
7645 @kindex show prettyprint
7646 @kindex show screen-height
7647 @kindex show screen-width
7648 @kindex show unionprint
7649 @kindex show vtblprint
7650 @kindex show demangle
7651 @kindex show asm-demangle
7652 @kindex show sevenbit-strings
7653 @kindex show array-max
7654 @kindex show caution
7655 @kindex show history write
7656 @kindex unset
7657
7658 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
7659 @ifinfo
7660 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
7661 @example
7662 OLD COMMAND NEW COMMAND
7663 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
7664 --------------- -------------------------------
7665 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
7666 add-syms add-symbol-file
7667 delete environment unset environment
7668 info convenience show convenience
7669 info copying show copying
7670 info directories show directories
7671 info editing show commands
7672 info history show values
7673 info targets help target
7674 info values show values
7675 info version show version
7676 info warranty show warranty
7677 set/show addressprint set/show print address
7678 set/show array-max set/show print elements
7679 set/show arrayprint set/show print array
7680 set/show asm-demangle set/show print asm-demangle
7681 set/show caution set/show confirm
7682 set/show demangle set/show print demangle
7683 set/show history write set/show history save
7684 set/show prettyprint set/show print pretty
7685 set/show screen-height set/show height
7686 set/show screen-width set/show width
7687 set/show sevenbit-strings set/show print sevenbit-strings
7688 set/show unionprint set/show print union
7689 set/show vtblprint set/show print vtbl
7690
7691 unset [No longer an alias for delete]
7692 @end example
7693 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
7694 @end ifinfo
7695
7696 @tex
7697 \vskip \parskip\vskip \baselineskip
7698 \halign{\tt #\hfil &\qquad#&\tt #\hfil\cr
7699 {\bf Old Command} &&{\bf New Command}\cr
7700 add-syms &&add-symbol-file\cr
7701 delete environment &&unset environment\cr
7702 info convenience &&show convenience\cr
7703 info copying &&show copying\cr
7704 info directories &&show directories \cr
7705 info editing &&show commands\cr
7706 info history &&show values\cr
7707 info targets &&help target\cr
7708 info values &&show values\cr
7709 info version &&show version\cr
7710 info warranty &&show warranty\cr
7711 set{\rm / }show addressprint &&set{\rm / }show print address\cr
7712 set{\rm / }show array-max &&set{\rm / }show print elements\cr
7713 set{\rm / }show arrayprint &&set{\rm / }show print array\cr
7714 set{\rm / }show asm-demangle &&set{\rm / }show print asm-demangle\cr
7715 set{\rm / }show caution &&set{\rm / }show confirm\cr
7716 set{\rm / }show demangle &&set{\rm / }show print demangle\cr
7717 set{\rm / }show history write &&set{\rm / }show history save\cr
7718 set{\rm / }show prettyprint &&set{\rm / }show print pretty\cr
7719 set{\rm / }show screen-height &&set{\rm / }show height\cr
7720 set{\rm / }show screen-width &&set{\rm / }show width\cr
7721 set{\rm / }show sevenbit-strings &&set{\rm / }show print sevenbit-strings\cr
7722 set{\rm / }show unionprint &&set{\rm / }show print union\cr
7723 set{\rm / }show vtblprint &&set{\rm / }show print vtbl\cr
7724 \cr
7725 unset &&\rm(No longer an alias for delete)\cr
7726 }
7727 @end tex
7728 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
7729
7730 @node Formatting Documentation, Installing GDB, Renamed Commands, Top
7731 @appendix Formatting the Documentation
7732
7733 @cindex GDB reference card
7734 @cindex reference card
7735 The GDB 4 release includes an already-formatted reference card, ready
7736 for printing with PostScript or GhostScript, in the @file{gdb}
7737 subdirectory of the main source directory---in
7738 @file{gdb-_GDB_VN__/gdb/refcard.ps} of the version _GDB_VN__ release.
7739 If you can use PostScript or GhostScript with your printer, you can
7740 print the reference card immediately with @file{refcard.ps}.
7741
7742 The release also includes the source for the reference card. You
7743 can format it, using @TeX{}, by typing:
7744
7745 @example
7746 make refcard.dvi
7747 @end example
7748
7749 The GDB reference card is designed to print in landscape mode on US
7750 ``letter'' size paper; that is, on a sheet 11 inches wide by 8.5 inches
7751 high. You will need to specify this form of printing as an option to
7752 your @sc{dvi} output program.
7753
7754 @cindex documentation
7755
7756 All the documentation for GDB comes as part of the machine-readable
7757 distribution. The documentation is written in Texinfo format, which is
7758 a documentation system that uses a single source file to produce both
7759 on-line information and a printed manual. You can use one of the Info
7760 formatting commands to create the on-line version of the documentation
7761 and @TeX{} (or @code{texi2roff}) to typeset the printed version.
7762
7763 GDB includes an already formatted copy of the on-line Info version of
7764 this manual in the @file{gdb} subdirectory. The main Info file is
7765 @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/gdb/gdb.info}, and it refers to
7766 subordinate files matching @samp{gdb.info*} in the same directory. If
7767 necessary, you can print out these files, or read them with any editor;
7768 but they are easier to read using the @code{info} subsystem in GNU Emacs
7769 or the standalone @code{info} program, available as part of the GNU
7770 Texinfo distribution.
7771
7772 If you want to format these Info files yourself, you need one of the
7773 Info formatting programs, such as @code{texinfo-format-buffer} or
7774 @code{makeinfo}.
7775
7776 If you have @code{makeinfo} installed, and are in the top level GDB
7777 source directory (@file{gdb-_GDB_VN__}, in the case of version _GDB_VN__), you can
7778 make the Info file by typing:
7779
7780 @example
7781 cd gdb
7782 make gdb.info
7783 @end example
7784
7785 If you want to typeset and print copies of this manual, you need
7786 @TeX{}, a printing program such as @code{lpr}, and @file{texinfo.tex},
7787 the Texinfo definitions file.
7788
7789 @TeX{} is typesetting program; it does not print files directly, but
7790 produces output files called @sc{dvi} files. To print a typeset
7791 document, you need a program to print @sc{dvi} files. If your system
7792 has @TeX{} installed, chances are it has such a program. The precise
7793 command to use depends on your system; @kbd{lpr -d} is common; another
7794 is @kbd{dvips}. The @sc{dvi} print command may require a file name
7795 without any extension or a @samp{.dvi} extension.
7796
7797 @TeX{} also requires a macro definitions file called
7798 @file{texinfo.tex}. This file tells @TeX{} how to typeset a document
7799 written in Texinfo format. On its own, @TeX{} cannot read, much less
7800 typeset a Texinfo file. @file{texinfo.tex} is distributed with GDB
7801 and is located in the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}/texinfo}
7802 directory.
7803
7804 If you have @TeX{} and a @sc{dvi} printer program installed, you can
7805 typeset and print this manual. First switch to the the @file{gdb}
7806 subdirectory of the main source directory (for example, to
7807 @file{gdb-_GDB_VN__/gdb}) and then type:
7808
7809 @example
7810 make gdb.dvi
7811 @end example
7812
7813 @node Installing GDB, Copying, Formatting Documentation, Top
7814 @appendix Installing GDB
7815 @cindex configuring GDB
7816 @cindex installation
7817
7818 @iftex
7819 @c irrelevant in info file; it's as current as the code it lives with.
7820 @quotation
7821 @emph{Warning:} These installation instructions are current as of
7822 GDB version _GDB_VN__. If you're installing a more recent release
7823 of GDB, we may have improved the installation procedures since
7824 printing this manual; see the @file{README} file included in your
7825 release for the most recent instructions.
7826 @end quotation
7827 @end iftex
7828
7829 GDB comes with a @code{configure} script that automates the process
7830 of preparing GDB for installation; you can then use @code{make} to
7831 build the program.
7832
7833 The GDB distribution includes all the source code you need for GDB in
7834 a single directory, whose name is usually composed by appending the
7835 version number to @samp{gdb}.
7836
7837 For example, the GDB version _GDB_VN__ distribution is in the @file{gdb-_GDB_VN__}
7838 directory. That directory contains:
7839
7840 @table @code
7841 @item gdb-_GDB_VN__/configure @r{(and supporting files)}
7842 script for configuring GDB and all its supporting libraries.
7843
7844 @item gdb-_GDB_VN__/gdb
7845 the source specific to GDB itself
7846
7847 @item gdb-_GDB_VN__/bfd
7848 source for the Binary File Descriptor library
7849
7850 @item gdb-_GDB_VN__/include
7851 GNU include files
7852
7853 @item gdb-_GDB_VN__/libiberty
7854 source for the @samp{-liberty} free software library
7855
7856 @item gdb-_GDB_VN__/readline
7857 source for the GNU command-line interface
7858
7859 @item gdb-_GDB_VN__/glob
7860 source for the GNU filename pattern-matching subroutine
7861
7862 @item gdb-_GDB_VN__/mmalloc
7863 source for the GNU memory-mapped malloc package
7864 @end table
7865
7866 The simplest way to configure and build GDB is to run @code{configure}
7867 from the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory, which in
7868 this example is the @file{gdb-_GDB_VN__} directory.
7869
7870 First switch to the @file{gdb-@var{version-number}} source directory
7871 if you are not already in it; then run @code{configure}. Pass the
7872 identifier for the platform on which GDB will run as an
7873 argument.
7874
7875 For example:
7876
7877 @example
7878 cd gdb-_GDB_VN__
7879 ./configure @var{host}
7880 make
7881 @end example
7882
7883 @noindent
7884 where @var{host} is an identifier such as @samp{sun4} or
7885 @samp{decstation}, that identifies the platform where GDB will run.
7886
7887 Running @samp{configure @var{host}} followed by @code{make} builds the
7888 @file{bfd}, @file{readline}, @file{mmalloc}, and @file{libiberty}
7889 libraries, then @code{gdb} itself. The configured source files, and the
7890 binaries, are left in the corresponding source directories.
7891
7892 @code{configure} is a Bourne-shell (@code{/bin/sh}) script; if your
7893 system does not recognize this automatically when you run a different
7894 shell, you may need to run @code{sh} on it explicitly:
7895
7896 @example
7897 sh configure @var{host}
7898 @end example
7899
7900 If you run @code{configure} from a directory that contains source
7901 directories for multiple libraries or programs, such as the
7902 @file{gdb-_GDB_VN__} source directory for version _GDB_VN__, @code{configure}
7903 creates configuration files for every directory level underneath (unless
7904 you tell it not to, with the @samp{--norecursion} option).
7905
7906 You can run the @code{configure} script from any of the
7907 subordinate directories in the GDB distribution, if you only want to
7908 configure that subdirectory; but be sure to specify a path to it.
7909
7910 For example, with version _GDB_VN__, type the following to configure only
7911 the @code{bfd} subdirectory:
7912
7913 @example
7914 @group
7915 cd gdb-_GDB_VN__/bfd
7916 ../configure @var{host}
7917 @end group
7918 @end example
7919
7920 You can install @code{_GDBP__} anywhere; it has no hardwired paths.
7921 However, you should make sure that the shell on your path (named by
7922 the @samp{SHELL} environment variable) is publicly readable. Remember
7923 that GDB uses the shell to start your program---some systems refuse to
7924 let GDB debug child processes whose programs are not readable.
7925
7926 @menu
7927 * Separate Objdir:: Compiling GDB in another directory
7928 * Config Names:: Specifying names for hosts and targets
7929 * configure Options:: Summary of options for configure
7930 @end menu
7931
7932 @node Separate Objdir, Config Names, Installing GDB, Installing GDB
7933 @section Compiling GDB in Another Directory
7934
7935 If you want to run GDB versions for several host or target machines,
7936 you'll need a different @code{gdb} compiled for each combination of
7937 host and target. @code{configure} is designed to make this easy by
7938 allowing you to generate each configuration in a separate subdirectory,
7939 rather than in the source directory. If your @code{make} program
7940 handles the @samp{VPATH} feature (GNU @code{make} does), running
7941 @code{make} in each of these directories then builds the @code{gdb}
7942 program specified there.
7943
7944 To build @code{gdb} in a separate directory, run @code{configure}
7945 with the @samp{--srcdir} option to specify where to find the source.
7946 (You'll also need to specify a path to find @code{configure}
7947 itself from your working directory. If the path to @code{configure}
7948 would be the same as the argument to @samp{--srcdir}, you can leave out
7949 the @samp{--srcdir} option; it will be assumed.)
7950
7951 For example, with version _GDB_VN__, you can build GDB in a separate
7952 directory for a Sun 4 like this:
7953
7954 @example
7955 @group
7956 cd gdb-_GDB_VN__
7957 mkdir ../gdb-sun4
7958 cd ../gdb-sun4
7959 ../gdb-_GDB_VN__/configure sun4
7960 make
7961 @end group
7962 @end example
7963
7964 When @code{configure} builds a configuration using a remote source
7965 directory, it creates a tree for the binaries with the same structure
7966 (and using the same names) as the tree under the source directory. In
7967 the example, you'd find the Sun 4 library @file{libiberty.a} in the
7968 directory @file{gdb-sun4/libiberty}, and GDB itself in
7969 @file{gdb-sun4/gdb}.
7970
7971 One popular reason to build several GDB configurations in separate
7972 directories is to configure GDB for cross-compiling (where GDB
7973 runs on one machine---the host---while debugging programs that run on
7974 another machine---the target). You specify a cross-debugging target by
7975 giving the @samp{--target=@var{target}} option to @code{configure}.
7976
7977 When you run @code{make} to build a program or library, you must run
7978 it in a configured directory---whatever directory you were in when you
7979 called @code{configure} (or one of its subdirectories).
7980
7981 The @code{Makefile} generated by @code{configure} for each source
7982 directory also runs recursively. If you type @code{make} in a source
7983 directory such as @file{gdb-_GDB_VN__} (or in a separate configured
7984 directory configured with @samp{--srcdir=@var{path}/gdb-_GDB_VN__}), you
7985 will build all the required libraries, then build GDB.
7986
7987 When you have multiple hosts or targets configured in separate
7988 directories, you can run @code{make} on them in parallel (for example,
7989 if they are NFS-mounted on each of the hosts); they will not interfere
7990 with each other.
7991
7992 @node Config Names, configure Options, Separate Objdir, Installing GDB
7993 @section Specifying Names for Hosts and Targets
7994
7995 The specifications used for hosts and targets in the @code{configure}
7996 script are based on a three-part naming scheme, but some short predefined
7997 aliases are also supported. The full naming scheme encodes three pieces
7998 of information in the following pattern:
7999
8000 @example
8001 @var{architecture}-@var{vendor}-@var{os}
8002 @end example
8003
8004 For example, you can use the alias @code{sun4} as a @var{host} argument
8005 or in a @code{--target=@var{target}} option, but the equivalent full name
8006 is @samp{sparc-sun-sunos4}.
8007
8008 The @code{configure} script accompanying GDB does not provide
8009 any query facility to list all supported host and target names or
8010 aliases. @code{configure} calls the Bourne shell script
8011 @code{config.sub} to map abbreviations to full names; you can read the
8012 script, if you wish, or you can use it to test your guesses on
8013 abbreviations---for example:
8014
8015 @smallexample
8016 % sh config.sub sun4
8017 sparc-sun-sunos411
8018 % sh config.sub sun3
8019 m68k-sun-sunos411
8020 % sh config.sub decstation
8021 mips-dec-ultrix42
8022 % sh config.sub hp300bsd
8023 m68k-hp-bsd
8024 % sh config.sub i386v
8025 i386-unknown-sysv
8026 % sh config.sub i786v
8027 Invalid configuration `i786v': machine `i786v' not recognized
8028 @end smallexample
8029
8030 @noindent
8031 @code{config.sub} is also distributed in the GDB source
8032 directory (@file{gdb-_GDB_VN__}, for version _GDB_VN__).
8033
8034 @node configure Options, , Config Names, Installing GDB
8035 @section @code{configure} Options
8036
8037 Here is a summary of all the @code{configure} options and arguments that
8038 you might use for building GDB:
8039
8040 @example
8041 configure @r{[}--srcdir=@var{path}@r{]}
8042 @r{[}--norecursion@r{]} @r{[}--rm@r{]}
8043 @r{[}--target=@var{target}@r{]} @var{host}
8044 @end example
8045
8046 @noindent
8047 You may introduce options with a single @samp{-} rather than
8048 @samp{--} if you prefer; but you may abbreviate option names if you use
8049 @samp{--}.
8050
8051 @table @code
8052 @item --srcdir=@var{path}
8053 @strong{Warning: using this option requires GNU @code{make}, or another
8054 @code{make} that implements the @code{VPATH} feature.}@*
8055 Use this option to make configurations in directories separate from the
8056 GDB source directories. Among other things, you can use this to
8057 build (or maintain) several configurations simultaneously, in separate
8058 directories. @code{configure} writes configuration specific files in
8059 the current directory, but arranges for them to use the source in the
8060 directory @var{path}. @code{configure} will create directories under
8061 the working directory in parallel to the source directories below
8062 @var{path}.
8063
8064 @item --norecursion
8065 Configure only the directory level where @code{configure} is executed; do not
8066 propagate configuration to subdirectories.
8067
8068 @item --rm
8069 Remove the configuration that the other arguments specify.
8070
8071 @c This does not work (yet if ever). FIXME.
8072 @c @item --parse=@var{lang} @dots{}
8073 @c Configure the GDB expression parser to parse the listed languages.
8074 @c @samp{all} configures GDB for all supported languages. To get a
8075 @c list of all supported languages, omit the argument. Without this
8076 @c option, GDB is configured to parse all supported languages.
8077
8078 @item --target=@var{target}
8079 Configure GDB for cross-debugging programs running on the specified
8080 @var{target}. Without this option, GDB is configured to debug
8081 programs that run on the same machine (@var{host}) as GDB itself.
8082
8083 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available targets.
8084
8085 @item @var{host} @dots{}
8086 Configure GDB to run on the specified @var{host}.
8087
8088 There is no convenient way to generate a list of all available hosts.
8089 @end table
8090
8091 @noindent
8092 @code{configure} accepts other options, for compatibility with
8093 configuring other GNU tools recursively; but these are the only
8094 options that affect GDB or its supporting libraries.
8095
8096 @node Copying, Index, Installing GDB, Top
8097 @unnumbered GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
8098 @center Version 2, June 1991
8099
8100 @display
8101 Copyright @copyright{} 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
8102 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA
8103
8104 Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
8105 of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
8106 @end display
8107
8108 @unnumberedsec Preamble
8109
8110 The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
8111 freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
8112 License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
8113 software---to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
8114 General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
8115 Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
8116 using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
8117 the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
8118 your programs, too.
8119
8120 When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
8121 price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
8122 have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
8123 this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
8124 if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
8125 in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
8126
8127 To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
8128 anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
8129 These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
8130 distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
8131
8132 For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
8133 gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
8134 you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
8135 source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
8136 rights.
8137
8138 We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
8139 (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
8140 distribute and/or modify the software.
8141
8142 Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
8143 that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
8144 software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
8145 want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
8146 that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
8147 authors' reputations.
8148
8149 Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
8150 patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
8151 program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
8152 program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
8153 patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
8154
8155 The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
8156 modification follow.
8157
8158 @iftex
8159 @unnumberedsec TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
8160 @end iftex
8161 @ifinfo
8162 @center TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
8163 @end ifinfo
8164
8165 @enumerate
8166 @item
8167 This License applies to any program or other work which contains
8168 a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
8169 under the terms of this General Public License. The ``Program'', below,
8170 refers to any such program or work, and a ``work based on the Program''
8171 means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
8172 that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
8173 either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
8174 language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
8175 the term ``modification''.) Each licensee is addressed as ``you''.
8176
8177 Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
8178 covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
8179 running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
8180 is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
8181 Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
8182 Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
8183
8184 @item
8185 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
8186 source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
8187 conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
8188 copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
8189 notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
8190 and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
8191 along with the Program.
8192
8193 You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
8194 you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
8195
8196 @item
8197 You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
8198 of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
8199 distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
8200 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
8201
8202 @enumerate a
8203 @item
8204 You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
8205 stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
8206
8207 @item
8208 You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
8209 whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
8210 part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
8211 parties under the terms of this License.
8212
8213 @item
8214 If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
8215 when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
8216 interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
8217 announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
8218 notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
8219 a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
8220 these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
8221 License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
8222 does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
8223 the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
8224 @end enumerate
8225
8226 These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
8227 identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
8228 and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
8229 themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
8230 sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
8231 distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
8232 on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
8233 this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
8234 entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
8235
8236 Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
8237 your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
8238 exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
8239 collective works based on the Program.
8240
8241 In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
8242 with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
8243 a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
8244 the scope of this License.
8245
8246 @item
8247 You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
8248 under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
8249 Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
8250
8251 @enumerate a
8252 @item
8253 Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
8254 source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
8255 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
8256
8257 @item
8258 Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
8259 years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
8260 cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
8261 machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
8262 distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
8263 customarily used for software interchange; or,
8264
8265 @item
8266 Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
8267 to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
8268 allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
8269 received the program in object code or executable form with such
8270 an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
8271 @end enumerate
8272
8273 The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
8274 making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
8275 code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
8276 associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
8277 control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
8278 special exception, the source code distributed need not include
8279 anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
8280 form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
8281 operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
8282 itself accompanies the executable.
8283
8284 If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
8285 access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
8286 access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
8287 distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
8288 compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
8289
8290 @item
8291 You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
8292 except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
8293 otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
8294 void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
8295 However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
8296 this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
8297 parties remain in full compliance.
8298
8299 @item
8300 You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
8301 signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
8302 distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
8303 prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
8304 modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
8305 Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
8306 all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
8307 the Program or works based on it.
8308
8309 @item
8310 Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
8311 Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
8312 original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
8313 these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
8314 restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
8315 You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
8316 this License.
8317
8318 @item
8319 If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
8320 infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
8321 conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
8322 otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
8323 excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
8324 distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
8325 License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
8326 may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
8327 license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
8328 all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
8329 the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
8330 refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
8331
8332 If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
8333 any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
8334 apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
8335 circumstances.
8336
8337 It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
8338 patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
8339 such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
8340 integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
8341 implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
8342 generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
8343 through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
8344 system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
8345 to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
8346 impose that choice.
8347
8348 This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
8349 be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8350
8351 @item
8352 If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
8353 certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
8354 original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
8355 may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
8356 those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
8357 countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
8358 the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
8359
8360 @item
8361 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
8362 of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
8363 be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
8364 address new problems or concerns.
8365
8366 Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
8367 specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and ``any
8368 later version'', you have the option of following the terms and conditions
8369 either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
8370 Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
8371 this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
8372 Foundation.
8373
8374 @item
8375 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
8376 programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
8377 to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
8378 Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
8379 make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
8380 of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
8381 of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
8382
8383 @iftex
8384 @heading NO WARRANTY
8385 @end iftex
8386 @ifinfo
8387 @center NO WARRANTY
8388 @end ifinfo
8389
8390 @item
8391 BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
8392 FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
8393 OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
8394 PROVIDE THE PROGRAM ``AS IS'' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
8395 OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
8396 MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
8397 TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
8398 PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
8399 REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
8400
8401 @item
8402 IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
8403 WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
8404 REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
8405 INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
8406 OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
8407 TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
8408 YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
8409 PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
8410 POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
8411 @end enumerate
8412
8413 @iftex
8414 @heading END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
8415 @end iftex
8416 @ifinfo
8417 @center END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
8418 @end ifinfo
8419
8420 @page
8421 @unnumberedsec Applying These Terms to Your New Programs
8422
8423 If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
8424 possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
8425 free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
8426
8427 To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
8428 to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
8429 convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
8430 the ``copyright'' line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
8431
8432 @smallexample
8433 @var{one line to give the program's name and an idea of what it does.}
8434 Copyright (C) 19@var{yy} @var{name of author}
8435
8436 This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
8437 modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
8438 as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
8439 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
8440
8441 This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
8442 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
8443 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
8444 GNU General Public License for more details.
8445
8446 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
8447 along with this program; if not, write to the
8448 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave,
8449 Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
8450 @end smallexample
8451
8452 Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
8453
8454 If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
8455 when it starts in an interactive mode:
8456
8457 @smallexample
8458 Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) 19@var{yy} @var{name of author}
8459 Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details
8460 type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome
8461 to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c'
8462 for details.
8463 @end smallexample
8464
8465 The hypothetical commands @samp{show w} and @samp{show c} should show
8466 the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the
8467 commands you use may be called something other than @samp{show w} and
8468 @samp{show c}; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items---whatever
8469 suits your program.
8470
8471 You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
8472 school, if any, to sign a ``copyright disclaimer'' for the program, if
8473 necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
8474
8475 @example
8476 Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright
8477 interest in the program `Gnomovision'
8478 (which makes passes at compilers) written
8479 by James Hacker.
8480
8481 @var{signature of Ty Coon}, 1 April 1989
8482 Ty Coon, President of Vice
8483 @end example
8484
8485 This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
8486 proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
8487 consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
8488 library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General
8489 Public License instead of this License.
8490
8491 @node Index, , Copying, Top
8492 @unnumbered Index
8493
8494 @printindex cp
8495
8496 @tex
8497 % I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8498 % meantime:
8499 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8500 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8501 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8502 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8503 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8504 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/},}
8505 \centerline{{\bf\fontname\tenbf}, and}
8506 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8507 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8508 \page\colophon
8509 % Blame: pesch@cygnus.com, 1991.
8510 @end tex
8511
8512 @contents
8513 @bye
This page took 0.197932 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.